diagramasde.comdiagramasde.com/diagramas/otros2/EP4000-5000SM.pdfinterleaf ep5000/ep4000 general, mechanical/electrical 97.04.01 g-5 1149sbg0300a 3 precautions for use

Interleaf EP5000/EP4000 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL97.04.01

1156SBG000AA


i

1149SBG000BA

CONTENTS

GENERAL

1. SPECIFICATIONS G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLATION G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE G-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. HANDLING OF THE CONSUMABLES G-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. SYSTEM OPTIONS G-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1156SBG000BA

MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL

1. CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW M-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. COPY PROCESS M-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. DRIVE SYSTEM M-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION M-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. WATCHDOG (CPU OVERRUN MONITOR) FUNCTION M-8. . . . . . . . . .

5-1. Configuration M-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2. Watchdog Function Post-Processing M-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. MALFUNCTION BYPASS FUNCTION M-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM M-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1. AIDC Sensor M-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2. Image Stabilization Control Processing Timing M-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3. Details of Image Stabilization Controls M-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. PC DRUM M-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9. DRUM CHARGING M-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1. Ozone Filter M-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. IMAGE ERASE LAMP M-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11. OPTICAL SECTION M-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-1. Exposure Lamp M-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2. AE Sensor M-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-3. Lamp Reflectors M-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4. Aperture Plates M-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5. Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirror Carriage Movement M-28. . . . . . . . . . .


ii

CONTENTS

11-6. Lens Movement M-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Movement M-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8. Original Glass Cooling Fan M-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12. ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SYSTEM M-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-1. Identification of Original Size Detecting Sensors M-33. . . . . . . . . . . 12-2. Original Size Detecting Operation M-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3. Sensor Locations M-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4. Size Detection M-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5. Original Size Detection Timing M-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13. DEVELOPMENT M-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-1. Developing Unit Drive Mechanism M-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2. Magnet Roller M-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3. Developing Bias M-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4. Doctor Blade M-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5. ATDC Sensor M-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6. Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism M-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detection Control M-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism M-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9. Swing Out/In the Main Hopper M-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14. IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION M-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14-1. Ozone Filter M-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. PAPER SEPARATOR FINGERS M-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16. CLEANING UNIT M-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16-1. Spent Toner Collection M-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2. Cleaning Bias (Optional) M-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17. MAIN ERASE LAMP M-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION M-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18-1. Drawer-in-Position Detection M-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2. Drawer Paper Lifting/Lowering Mechanism/Control M-60. . . . . . . . . 18-3. Paper Level Detection M-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4. Paper Empty Detection M-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5. Universal Tray (2nd Drawer) Paper Size Detection M-68. . . . . . . . . 18-6. Paper Take-Up Mechanism M-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7. Paper Take-Up Control M-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19. MULTI BYPASS TABLE M-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19-1. Paper Take-Up Mechanism M-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2. Paper Separating Mechanism M-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3. Paper Empty Detection M-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


iii

CONTENTS20. VERTICAL PAPER TRANSPORT M-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21. SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS M-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21-1. Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism M-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2. Paper Dust Remover M-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3. Synchronizing Roller Control M-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4. Prevention of Low Image Density on Copy M-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22. PAPER TRANSPORT M-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-1. Suction Belt Drive Mechanism M-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23. FUSING UNIT M-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23-1. Fusing Temperature Control M-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2. Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism M-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3. Cleaning Roller M-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4. Paper Separator Fingers M-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5. Fusing Section Cooling Fan M-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24. EXIT UNIT M-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24-1. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position M-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25. DEHUMIDIFYING SWITCH M-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26. MEMORY BACKUP M-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


1151SBG000D

SAFETY INFORMATION

ALL Areas

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or equivalent type

recommended by the manufacturer.Dispose of used batteries accordingto the manufacturer’s instructions.

Denmark

ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri

af samme fabrikat og type.Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.

Norway

ADVARSEL

Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende

type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens

instruksjoner.

Sweden

VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent

typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens

instruktion.

Finland

VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan

tyyppiin. Hävitä Käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeidenmukaisesti.


1151SBG000CA


G-1

1156SBG0100A

SPECIFICATIONS1TYPE : Console (with Stationary Platen)

PHOTOCONDUCTOR : Organic Photoconductor

COPYING SYSTEM : Electrostatic Dry Powdered Image Transfer to Plain Paper

PAPER FEEDING : 3-Way Feeding 1st Drawer: Fixed Paper Size TraySYSTEM (500 sheets of paper,

USA Area: 550 sheets ofpaper)

2nd Drawer: Universal Tray(500 sheets of paper, USAArea: 550 sheets of paper)

Multi Bypass Table(50 sheets of paper)

EXPOSURE SYSTEM : Mirror Scanning, Slit Exposure

DEVELOPING SYSTEM : New Micro-Toning System

CHARGING SYSTEM : Comb Electrode DC Negative Corona with Scorotron System

IMAGE TRANSFER : Visible Image Transfer by means of a Single-Wire DC SYSTEM Negative Corona with Corotron System

PAPER SEPARATING : Single-Wire AC Corona with Corotron System, plus SYSTEM Paper Separator Finger

FUSING SYSTEM : Heat Roller

PAPER DISCHARGING : Charge Neutralizing BrushSYSTEM

MAXIMUM ORIGINAL : Metric-A3L; Inch-11” 17”L (L: Lengthwise)SIZE

COPY MEDIUM

1st Drawer(Automatic

feeding)

2nd Drawer(Automatic

feeding)

Multi BypassTable

Plain paper(60 to 90 g/m2)

Translucent paper – –

diu

m

Transparencies – –

Me

Thick paper(91 to 157 g/m2)

– –

Recycled paper

sio

ns Maximum

(Width Length)297 432 mm 297 432 mm 297 432 mm

Dim

ens

Minimum(Width Length)

140 182 mm 140 182 mm 100 140 mm

: Permissible –: Not permissible


G-2

MULTIPLE COPIES : 1 to 999

WARMING-UP TIME : 240 sec. or less with room temperature of 20°C and rated power voltage

FIRST COPY TIME : A4C or 8-1/2” 11”C: 3.7 sec. or less(in Full size Mode using 1st Drawer)

CONTINUOUS COPY SPEED (copies/min.): Fed from 1st DrawerEP5000:

AreaZoom Ratio

Size 1.000

Metric

A3LA4LA4CB4L

28375031

AreaZoom Ratio

Size 1.000

Inch

11” 17” (L)8-1/2” 11” (L)8-1/2” 11” (C)

283950

L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

EP4000:

AreaZoom Ratio

Size 1.000

Metric

A3LA4LA4CB4L

26344029

AreaZoom Ratio

Size 1.000

Inch

11” 17” (L)8-1/2” 11” (L)8-1/2” 11” (C)

253540

L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

ZOOM RATIOS

Metric Inch

Full Size 1.000 1.000

Fixed Reduction0.8160.7070.500

0.7850.7330.6470.500

Enlargement1.1541.4142.000

1.2141.2941.5452.000

Variable 50% to 200% (in 0.1% increments)

LENS : Through Lens (F = 6, f = 190 mm)

EXPOSURE LAMP : Halogen Frost Tube Lamp

FUSING : 200°CTEMPERATURE

AreaMode


G-3

POWER/CURRENT CONSUMPTION (Copier Only)EP5000:

VoltageExposure

Lamp(Rating)

FusingHeaterLamp

(Rating)

Max. PowerConsumption

115 V 1390 W

120 V 80 V 115/120 V1450 W

127 V262 W 950 W

1480 W

220 V 160 V 220/240 V 1410 W

240 V 290 W 1000 W 1550 W

EP4000:

VoltageExposure

Lamp(Rating)

FusingHeaterLamp

(Rating)

Max. PowerConsumption

115 V 1250 W

120 V 80 V 115/120 V1330 W

127 V262 W 900 W

1400 W

220 V 160 V 220/240 V 1360 W

240 V 290 W 950 W 1500 W

POWER : 115 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V; 50/60 HzREQUIREMENTS

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Temperature 10 to 30°C with a fluctuation of 10°C or less per hour

Humidity 15 to 85% RH with a fluctuation of 10% RH or less per hour

Ambient Illumination 3,000 lux or less

Levelness 1° (1.75 mm/100 mm)

DIMENSIONS : Width .... 620 mm (24-1/2”)(Copier Only) Depth .... 740 mm (27”)

Height ... 960 mm (37-3/4”) (including Original Cover andPaper Feed Cabinet)

WEIGHT : EP5000: (with Paper Feed Cabinet)123.5kg (272-1/4lbs)EP4000: (with Paper Feed Cabinet)122.0kg (269lbs)*excluding the Copy Tray, starter, toner, and paper


G-4

1149SBG0200A

PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLATION2

Installation SiteTo ensure safety and utmost performance of the copier, the copier should NOT beused in a place: Where it will be subjected to extremely high or low temperature or humidity. Which is exposed to direct sunlight. Which is in the direct air stream of an air conditioner, heater or ventilator. Which puts the operator in the direct stream of exhaust from the copier. Which has poor ventilation. Where ammonia gas might be generated. Which does not have a stable, level floor. Where it will be subjected to sudden fluctuations in either temperature or humidity.

If a cold room is quickly heated, condensation forms inside the copier, resulting inblank spots in the copy.

Which is near any kind of heating device. Where it may be splashed with water. Which is dirty or where it will receive undue vibration. Which is near volatile flammables or curtains.

Power SourceUse an outlet with a capacity of 115/120/127V, 1480W or more, or 220-240V, 1550Wor more. If any other electrical equipment is sourced from the same power outlet, make sure

that the capacity of the outlet is not exceeded. Use a power source with little voltage fluctuation. Never connect by means of a multiple socket any other appliances or machines

to the outlet being used for the copier. Make the following checks at frequent intervals:

Is the power plug abnormally hot? Are there any cracks or scrapes in the cord? Has the power plug been inserted fully into the outlet? Does something, including the copier itself, ride on the power cord?

Ensure that the copier does not ride on the power cord or communications cableof other electrical equipment, and that it does not become wedged into or under-neath the mechanism.

GroundingTo prevent receiving electrical shocks in the case of electrical leakage, always groundthe copier. Connect the grounding wire to:

The ground terminal of the outlet. A grounding contact which complies with the local electrical standards.

Never connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe, the grounding wire for a telephone,or a water pipe.


G-5

1149SBG0300A

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE3

To ensure that the copier is used in an optimum condition, observe the following pre-cautions. Never place a heavy object on the copier or subject the copier to shocks. Insert the power plug all the way into the outlet. Do not attempt to remove any panel or cover which is secured while the copier is

making copies. Do not turn OFF the Power Switch while the copier is making copies. Provide good ventilation when making a large number of copies continuously. Never use flammable sprays near the copier. If the copier becomes inordinately hot or produces abnormal noise, turn it OFF and

unplug it. Do not turn ON the Power Switch at the same time when you plug the power cord

into the outlet. When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord; hold the plug and pull

it out. Do not bring any magnetized object near the copier. Do not place a vase or vessel containing water on the copier. Be sure to turn OFF the Power Switch at the end of the workday or upon power

failure. Use care not to drop paper clips, staples, or other small pieces of metal into the

copier.

Operating EnvironmentThe operating environmental requirements of the copier are as follows.

Temperature: 10°C to 30°C with a fluctuation of 10°C per hour Humidity: 15% to 85% RH with a fluctuation of 10% RH per hour

Power RequirementsThe power source voltage requirements are as follows.

Voltage Fluctuation: AC115/120/127/220-240V 10% (Copying performance assured)6%, –10% (Only AC 127V)–15% (Paper feeding performance assured)

Frequency Fluctuation: 50/60 Hz 0.3%


G-6

1151SBG0400A

HANDLING OF THE CONSUMABLES4

Before using any consumables, always read the label on its container carefully. Use the right toner. The applicable copier model name is indicated on the Toner

Bottle. Paper can to be easily damaged by dampness. To prevent absorption of moisture,

store paper, which has been removed from its wrapper but not loaded into theDrawer, in a sealed plastic bag in a cool, dark place.

Keep consumables out of the reach of children. Do not touch the PC Drum with bare hands. Store the paper, toner, and other consumables in a place free from direct sunlight

and away from any heating apparatus. The same sized paper is of two kinds, short grain and long grain. Short grain paper

should only be fed through the copier crosswise, long grain paper should only befed lengthwise.

If your hands become soiled with toner, wash them with soap and waterimmediately.

Do not throw away any used consumables (PC Drum, starter, toner, etc.). They areto be collected.

NOTEDo not burn, bury in the ground, or throw into the water any consumables (PC Drum, starter, toner, etc.).


G-7

1156SBG0500A

SYSTEM OPTIONS5

1, 2

7, 8

65

4

3

9,10

1112

1149M026AA

1138O525AA

1136O061AA 1134O005AA

13

1. Automatic Document Feeder AF-52. Duplexing Document Feeder AFR-133. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-1054. Duplex Cabinet PF-5D5. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-2056. Duplex Unit AD-97. 10-Bin Sorter S-106

8. 10-Bin Staple Sorter ST-1049. 20-Bin Sorter S-20810. 20-Bin Staple Sorter ST-21111. Data Terminal12. Data Controller D-10213. Large Capacity Cassette C-301


1151SBM000CA


M-1

1156SBM0100A

CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW1

21 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 22 2124

20

18

25

17

16

11 12 13 14

15

1134M001AB

19

2627

28

29

30

1. 3rd Mirror2. 2nd Mirror3. 1st Mirror4. Exposure Lamp5. Ventilation Fan Motor6. Ozone Filter7. Lens8. Main Erase Lamp9. Cleaning Blade

10. PC Drum Charge Corona11. PC Drum12. 6th Mirror13. Image Erase Lamp14. 4th Mirror15. 5th Mirror16. Sub Hopper17. Transport Roller

18. Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll19. Upper Vertical Transport Roller20. Lower Vertical Transport Roller21. 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll22. 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll23. Synchronizing Roller24. Image Transfer/Paper Separa-

tor Coronas25. Main Drive Motor26. Suction Belt27. Fusing Roller28. 1st Paper Exit Roller29. 2nd Paper Exit Roller30. Exit/Duplex Switching Guide


M-2

1156SBM0200A

COPY PROCESS2

1. PC DRUM2. DRUM CHARGING3. IMAGE ERASE4. EXPOSURE5. DEVELOPING6. PAPER FEEDING7. IMAGE TRANSFER

8. PAPER SEPARATION9. CLEANING10. MAIN ERASE11. TRANSPORT12. FUSING13. PAPER EXIT

1 59

10

2 3

4

6

13 12 11 8 7MULTI BYPASSTABLE

1. PC DrumThe PC Drum is an aluminum cylinder coated with a photosensitive semiconductor. It is used as the medium on which a visible developed image of the original is formed.

(For more details, see “8. PC DRUM”.)

2. Drum ChargingThe PC Drum Charge Corona Unit is equipped with a Comb Electrode and a Scorotron Grid todeposit a uniform negative charge across the entire surface of the PC Drum.

(For more details, see “9. DRUM CHARGING”.)

3. Image EraseAny areas of charge which are not to be developed are neutralized by lighting up LEDs.

(For more details, see “10. IMAGE ERASE LAMP”.)

4. ExposureLight from the Exposure Lamp reflected off the original is guided to the surface of the PCDrum and reduces the level of the negative charges, thereby forming an electrostatic latentimage.

(For more details, see “11. OPTICAL SECTION”.)

5. DevelopingToner positively charged in the Developer Mixing Chamber is attracted onto the electrostaticlatent image changing it to a visible, developed image. A DC negative bias voltage is appliedto the Sleeve/Magnet Roller to prevent toner from being attracted onto those areas of the PCDrum which correspond to the background areas of the original.

(For more details, see “13. DEVELOPMENT”.)


M-3

6. Paper FeedingPaper is fed either automatically from the 1st or 2nd Drawer, or manually via the Multi BypassTable or Manual Bypass Table. Paper separation is accomplished by the torque limiter fitted tothe Paper Separator Roll.

(For more details, see “18. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION”.)

7. Image TransferThe single-wire Image Transfer Corona Unit applies a DC negative corona emission to theunderside of the paper, thereby attracting toner onto the surface of the paper.

(For more details, see “14. IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION”.)

8. Paper SeparationThe single-wire Paper Separator Corona Unit applies an AC corona emission to the undersideof the paper to neutralize the paper. In addition, mechanical paper separation is provided bythe two PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers fitted to the Imaging Unit.

(For more details, see “14. IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION”.)

9. CleaningResidual toner on the surface of the PC Drum is scraped off by the Cleaning Blade.

(For more details, see “16. CLEANING UNIT”.)

10. Main EraseLight from the Main Erase Lamp neutralizes any surface potential remaining on the surface ofthe PC Drum after cleaning.

(For more details, see “17. MAIN ERASE LAMP”.)

11. TransportThe paper is fed to the Fusing Unit by the Suction Belts.

(For more details, see “22. PAPER TRANSPORT”.)

12. FusingThe developed image is permanently fused to the paper by a combination of heat andpressure applied by the Upper and Lower Fusing Rollers.

(For more details, see “23. FUSING UNIT”.)

13. Paper ExitAfter the fusing process the paper is fed out by the Paper Exit Roller onto the Copy Tray.

(For more details, see “24. EXIT UNIT”.)


M-4

1156SBM0300A

DRIVE SYSTEM3

The Main Drive Motor provides drive for the entire mechanism of the copier. To help mini-mize operating noise, timing belts and plastic gears are used in large numbers for thedrive train parts.

1136M002AA

2nd Paper Exit Roller Drive

Upper Fusing Roller

Drive Gear

Toner Conveying Coil Drive

(on PC Unit)

Main Drive Motor

Synchronizing Roller Clutch

Paper Transport Clutch

Lower Vertical Transport Roller Drive

Upper Vertical

Transport Roller

Drive

Manual Feed Paper

Take-Up Clutch

Developing Section Drive

PC Drum Drive

Suction Unit Drive


M-5

1156SBM0400A

SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION4

A The power cord is plugged into the outlet.

ON

ON

ON Paper DehumidifyingHeater H2

Drum DehumidifyingHeater H3

DC Power Supply Unit PU1 outputs DC24V for dehumidifying heating.

Only when Drum DehumidifyingSwitch S3 and Paper Dehumidi-fying Switch S12 are ON

B Power Switch S1 is turned ON.

OFF

ONH2

PU1 outputs DC24V and DC 5V.

ON Fusing Section Cooling Fan Motor M15

ON Control panel displayON Suction Fan Motor M4 turns at half speed.

Approx. 1sec. Fusing Heater Lamp H1ON

ON Power Supply Board PWB-C outputs DC 24V.(DC24V line: ON)

ONMaster Board PWB-A outputs DC4.7V and DC12V.

The Lens is detected at the home position.

The Mirror is detected at the home position.

The Scanner makes its initial motion.

The Lens is detected at the full size position.

The Mirror is detected at the full size position.

The surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller reaches 165°C.

ON Main Drive Motor M1 and Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5start predrive.

ONVentilation Fan Motor M3

ONM4 turns at full speed.

ONDeveloping Bias/Paper Separator Corona

Approx. 100msec. ONImage Erase Lamp LA2

Approx.

200msec.

ON

ON

PC Drum Charge Corona/Image Transfer Corona

M4 turns at full speed.

Main Erase Lamp LA3To on next page

*1

* Figure in ( ) are the timer values for EP5000.


M-6

C The Start Key is pressed.

After the lapse of 30sec.

or 15sec.

*30sec. if the Upper Fusing Roller surface tempera-ture is less than 165°C when S1 is turned ON and15sec. if the surface temperature is 165°C or high-er.

Approx. 5msec. OFF PC Drum Charge Corona/ImageTransfer Corona

Approx. 160msec. OFFLA2

Approx. 285msec. OFFM1/M5

OFFLA3

Approx. 150msec.(500msec.)

OFFDeveloping Bias/Pa-per Separator Corona


M4 turns at half speed.

M3

*2

The components are energized in order of *1 on the preceding page.

Approx. *3ON

Exposure Lamp LA1

OFF Fusing Section Cooling Fan Motor M15ON

Paper Transport Clutch CL1ON

1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M11

1st Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor PC63 is blocked ( ).L

Approx. 5msec.OFF

M11

Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 is blocked ( ).L

Approx. 45msec.OFF

CL1

D SCP Board PWB-F outputs a LOW BASE signal to Master Board PWB-A.


OFFLA3...Leading edge erase

*3 : Varies for differentdrawers.


M-7

ON

ONCL1

Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2

E PWB-F outputs a LOW TRON signal to PWB-A.

Approx. 170msec. ON Separator Solenoid SL1

Approx. 150msec. OFF SL1

F PWB-F outputs a LOW SCEND signal to PWB-A.

Approx. 200msec.

SCAN signal: ...The Scanner stops and starts a return motion.H

Approx. 250msec.OFF LA1

G The trailing edge of the paper moves past Transport Roller Sensor PC54

(unblocked: )H

Approx. 5msec.OFF

CL1

H The trailing edge of the paper moves past Paper Leading Edge Detecting

Sensor PC55 (unblocked: )H

Approx. 210msec.OFF

CL2

I The Trailing edge of the paper moves past Paper Exit Switch S53 (ON: ).H

The components are deenergized in order of *2 on the preceding

page.


M-8

1149SBM0500A

WATCHDOG (CPU OVERRUN MONITOR) FUNCTION5

The watchdog function monitors whether any of the CPUs mounted in the copieroverrun. If this function detects that a CPU overruns, the copier automatically resets theCPU, thereby restarting the logic circuit and mechanism.

Even if a copier CPU operates erratically due to electrical noise, therefore, the copieris able to recover from the faulty condition so that the number of visits made by theTechnical Representative for CPU overrun can be minimized.

1156SBM0501A

5-1. Configuration

The copier has three printed-circuit boards each on which a CPU is mounted:*SCP Board PWB-F that controls the optical system,*Master Board PWB-A that controls the copier, Paper Feed Cabinet and Duplex Unit,and

*MSC Board PWB-B that controls the control panel and system.In addition to these, each of the control boards for the Data Controller, DuplexingDocument Feeder, and Sorter/Staple Sorter is equipped with a CPU.

The watchdog functions are summarized as follows:*Each of the copier CPUs monitors whether or not it overruns.*The MSC CPU monitors the communications conditions of the CPUs in the DuplexingDocument Feeder and Data Controller.

*The Master CPU monitors the communications conditions of the CPUs in the Sorter andStaple Sorter.

*The control boards for the Paper Feed Cabinet and Duplex Unit do not have a CPU inthem. Instead, the Master CPU in the copier controls their operations.

Data Controller

Control Board

Sorter, Staple Sorter

Control Board (PWB-A)

Duplexing Document Feeder

Copier

SCP Board PWB-F

MSC Board PWB-B

Master Board PWB-A

Paper Feed Cabinet, Duplex Unit

Large Capacity Cassette

= Board on which aCPU is mounted

Control Board (PWB-A)


M-9

1149SBM0502A

5-2. Watchdog Function Post-Processing

The following processing is performed if a faulty condition is detected in the CPU.When the copier CPU is found faulty:

All CPUs including those of the options are reset and the system is restarted. If theCPU is found faulty during a copy cycle, the system attempts to feed all sheets ofpaper out of the copier before resetting. (If paper is left inside the copier, the copierdetects it as a misfeed as it is restarted.)

When an option CPU is found faulty: The option relays are turned OFF and ON and all options are then restarted. If the

CPU is found faulty during a copy cycle, the copier stops the paper take-upsequence and feeds all sheets of paper out of the copier before resetting.

The Watchdog Counter available from the Tech. Rep. mode allows the TechnicalRepresentative to check if any faulty condition has occurred in the CPU. For details, seeSWITCHES ON PWBs.


M-10

1156SBM0600A

MALFUNCTION BYPASS FUNCTION6

When a malfunction occurs in the copier, the malfunction bypass function permitsthe copier to continue operating if that malfunction is one of the predefinedcandidates for an isolated malfunction and if it will not affect the current copyingoperation. But, if an isolated malfunction occurs anytime during the actual copycycle, the copier considers it a normal malfunction.

If a copying function involving an isolated malfunction is selected, the message“Selected mode can’t be used.” appears on the Touch Panel and the copier rejectsthat function.

When an isolated malfunction occurs, a tiny wrench “ ” indicator appears in thelower left corner of the Basic Screen. Access the “Machine Status” display bytouching the wrench icon or via the Tech. Rep. mode to ascertain the trouble code.Then refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for details.

Trouble codes for up to five isolated malfunctions are shown on the “MachineStatus” display. When a sixth isolated malfunction occurs, the copier considers ita normal malfunction, prompting a Tech. Rep. call. (The sixth malfunction is shownon the Touch Panel.) But, if all of the paper feed ports (except the manual feed port)show an isolated malfunction, the copier considers them a normal malfunction eventhough the isolated malfunction count may be less than five. The display also tellsthe condition when the image stabilization controls are not properly working.

For the details of the Isolated malfunction codes, see TROUBLESHOOTING for the

copier and the specific SERVICE MANUAL for the options.


M-11

1149SBM0700A

IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM7

The following image stabilization controls are provided to ensure stabilized copyimage.

Item Quality Purpose Control

Initial Setting Image density, gradation

To make initial settings ofgrid voltage (Vg), optimumExposure Lamp voltage, andAE Sensor gain.

Sets the initial values for gridvoltage correction, optimumExposure Lamp voltagecorrection, and AE Sensorgain adjustment.

Regular correction Image density To compensate for any dropin image density due to adeteriorating PC Drum.

Corrects the grid voltagethrough AIDC Sensorcontrol.

Gradation To compensate for any dropin the intensity of LA1 lightdue to a contaminatedoptical system.

Corrects the optimumExposure Lamp voltagethrough AIDC control.

Foggybackground

To keep a giventoner-to-carrier ratio of thedeveloper in the DeveloperMixing Chamber.

Provides toner replenishingcontrol by means of theATDC Sensor. (For details,see 13. DEVELOPMENT.)

Correction madeimmediately afterPower Switch is

turned ON

Image density,gradation

To compensate for any dropin PC Drum surface potentialwhen the copier is coolimmediately after the Powerswitch is turned ON.

Corrects the grid voltage andoptimum Exposure Lampvoltage through AIDCSensor control.

Correction forFaulty AIDC

Sensor

Image density, gradation

To compensate for imagedensity and gradationaggravated by a faulty AIDCSensor.

Corrects the grid voltage andoptimum Exposure Lampvoltage according to the timethrough which the PC Drumhas turned and the copierhas run.

The following is the block diagram of the image stabilization system.

1136M003AAAIDC

ATDC

CPU

PWB-A

HV1

PU2

EE

TonerReplenishing

Image Erase Lamp LA3

ExposureLamp LA1 Original Width Scale

Original Glass

Halftone Patch


M-12

1149SBM0701A

7-1. AlDC Sensor

To provide image stabilization control, this copier has AlDC Sensor PWB-G fitted tothe Cleaning Unit of the Imaging Unit. The sensor is used to detect the toner densityand background level on the PC Drum.

Operation

1: The PWB-G LED projects approx. 950-nm infrared light onto the surface of the PCDrum.

2: The PWB-G phototransistor detects the amount of light reflected back.3: The phototransistor outputs a voltage corresponding to the intensity of the light

reflected back.

Output GNDLED Power SupplyPC Drum

AIDC Sensor

Image Transfer/Paper Separation Coronas1149M005AA

Toner Density on PC Drum Light reflected Output Voltage

High Small High

Low Large Low


M-13

1156SBM0702A

7-2. Image Stabilization Control Processing Timing

The image stabilization controls use the AIDC Sensor and AE Sensor as the basis,performing the following four major types of processing.The grid voltage, T/C, and optimum Exposure Lamp corrections are not, however,made if T/C falls outside the range of 4% to 8% at adjustment.

AIDC Sensor adjustment Grid voltage and T/C correction

Optimum Exposure Lamp voltagecorrection

AE Sensor gain adjustment

Processing Timing

ItemTiming

Processing (: Performed; : Not performed)

Processing Order ( )

Initial setting At the initial setup, or when the FF orF5 test operation is run after the PCDrum has been replaced.

(*1)

Regular correction Upon completion of the copy cycle forevery 400 copies made in terms of thenumber of intermittent copies, as it isequivalent to the time over which thePC Drum turns.

Correction im-mediately after S1is turned ON

During warming-up immediately afterthe Power Switch has been turned ON(*3)

Correction for afaulty AIDCSensor

Upon completion of the copy cycle forevery 75K copies made in terms of thenumber of intermittent copies, as it isequivalent to the time over which thePC Drum has turned after a faultyAIDC Sensor was detected.

(*2)

(*2)

*1:T/C is not corrected when an F5 test operation is run.*2:The grid voltage is increased by 30V and the optimum Exposure Lamp voltage by 1V.

No T/C correction is made even when the grid voltage reaches its upper limit.*3:The correction sequence is canceled as regular correction starts.


M-14

1156SBM0703A

7-3. Details of Image Stabilization Controls

AIDC Sensor adjustment Grid voltage and T/C correction

Optimum Exposure Lamp voltagecorrection

AE Sensor gain adjustment

The following is the details of each image stabilization control.

-1 AIDC Sensor coarse adjustmentThis adjustment represents a coarse adjustment of the AIDC Sensor when theordinary control of only the LED current cannot cover part-to-part variations in theAIDC Sensor (installation, circuit, deterioration, etc.). The surface of the PC Drumwhose charges have been neutralized is exposed to light from the LED. The outputcurrent from the AIDC Sensor goes through the load resistance selected by a 4-bitanalog switch and the 4-bit analog switch selects the load resistance so that theresultant voltage becomes 1V or less.

-2 AIDC Sensor fine adjustmentIf the AIDC Sensor is dirty with toner, it results in an error being produced in thesensor output voltage value, providing a false reference value. The surface of thePC Drum which has been erased is exposed to light from the LED. The LED currentvalue is varied through pulse width control so that the output voltage from the AIDCSensor becomes 1V.

Controlled Part Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM

AIDC Sensor PJ11A-7A Pulse output 1-I

Grid voltage and T/C correctionThe Image Erase Lamp produces a solid-black pattern on the surface of the PCDrum and the AIDC Sensor reads the pattern. The grid voltage is then varied sothat the output from the AIDC Sensor remains at a given level or higher, which en-sures that the toner-to-carrier ratio on the surface of the PC Drum becomesconstant.If an even greater solid-black density is required when the upper control limit of thegrid voltage has already been reached, the target control value of T/C is raised in0.5% steps up to 7%, thus terminating the adjustment sequence.

Control Value 1 Step Initial Value

Grid Voltage 550 to 790V 30V 550V


M-15

<Relation with Image Density>The “Image Exposure” function of “Tech. Rep. Choice” available from the Tech. Rep.mode enables fine-adjustments of the grid voltage (solid-black image density) to bemade. It specifies how many volts the optimum grid voltage determined by the imagestabilization control is to be increased or decreased. This fine-adjustment valueremains the same even when the optimum grid voltage is later varied by the imagestabilization control.


Grid voltage output fromHigh Voltage Unit HV1

PJ13A-1 Pulse Output 3-F

Optimum Exposure Lamp voltage correctionThe Exposure Lamp is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back ofthe Original Width Scale, thereby producing a halftone pattern on the surface of thePC Drum. The Exposure Lamp voltage is then varied so that the output from theAIDC Sensor falls within the target range, thereby ensuring an optimum exposurelevel.

Control Value 1 Step Initial Value

Exposure Lamp voltage(100V Areas)

40 to 80V 1V 58V

Exposure Lamp voltage(200V Areas)

80 to 160V 2V 116V

<Relation with “Manual Exposure Level” of F5>The “manual exposure level” of Function F5 available from the Tech. Rep. modeenables fine-adjustments of the Exposure Lamp voltage (halftone image density) tobe made. It specifies how many volts the optimum Exposure Lamp voltagedetermined by the image stabilization control is to be increased or decreased. Thisfine-adjustment value remains the same even when the optimum Exposure Lampvoltage is later varied by the image stabilization control.


Exposure Lamp Regulator (PWB-J) REM

PJ8A-12 Pulse output 45-H

AE Sensor gain adjustmentThe Exposure Lamp is turned ON to illuminate the blank sheet of paper placed onthe Original Glass (when an F5 or FF operation is run) or the halftone patch on theback of the Original Width Scale (when the AE Sensor gain is adjusted in a se-quence other than F5 or FF). The reflected light is then read by the AE Sensor anda gain adjustment of the AE Sensor is made to maintain an optimum Auto exposurelevel.


AE Sensor Board PWB-H PJ3A-2 Pulse Output 12-B


M-16

1149SBM0800A

PC DRUM8

The photoconductive drum used in this copier is the organic photoconductor (OPC) type.The drum is made up of two distinct, semiconductive materials on an aluminum alloybase. The outer of the two layers is called the Charge Transport Layer (CTL), while theinner layer is called the Charge Generating Layer (CGL).

The PC Drum has its grounding point inside at the rear end. When the Imaging Unit isinstalled in the copier, the shaft on which the PC Drum Drive Coupling Gear is mountedcontacts this grounding point.

Handling PrecautionsThis photoconductor exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to light over anextended period of time. It must therefore be protected from light by a clean, soft clothwhenever the Imaging Unit has been removed from the copier. Further, use utmost carewhen handling the PC Drum to prevent it from being contaminated.

PC Drum

Gear

PC Drum Cross-Sectional View

CTL

CGLAluminumCylinder

Shaft

GroundingPlate

PC Drum Drive Coupling Gear

Grounding Point


M-17

1156SBM0900A

DRUM CHARGING9

The PC Drum Charge Corona has a Scorotron grid to deposit a negative DC chargeevenly across the surface of the PC Drum. The grid voltage (VG) applied to the grid meshis selected between –550V (initial value, variable according to image stabilizationcontrols) in the normal mode and the value in the normal mode +90V in the Photo modeby the Constant-Voltage Circuit in High Voltage Unit HV1.

The Corona Unit has a Comb Electrode which minimizes the amount of ozone produced.The conventional wire type corona unit produces a large amount of ozone due to coronadischarge in radial directions. The comb electrode type, on the other hand, dischargesonly toward the Grid Mesh, meaning a reduced amount of ozone is produced.

The Comb Electrode can be cleaned by the user who pulls out to the front the shaft onwhich a Cleaning Rollar is mounted.

Holder Comb Electrode Spring Holder

Grid Mesh

1151T03MCC

Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM

PC Drum

Charge CoronaPWB-A PJ13A-2 L H 3-F

Control Signal NormalMode Photo Mode WIRING DIAGRAM

Grid Voltage

(VG)PWB-A PJ13A-1 Pulse output 3-F


M-18

1156SBM0901A

9-1. Ozone Filter

Ozone produced by the PC Drum Charge Corona is absorbed by the Ozone Filter lo-cated to the left of the PC Drum Charge Corona, as the air is drawn out of the copierby Ventilation Fan Motor M3.

1134M004AA

Ventilation Fan Motor M3

Ozone Filter PC Drum Charge Corona


M3 PJ34A-1 H L 11-F


M-19

1156SBM1000A

IMAGE ERASE LAMP10

To prevent a black band from occurring across both the leading and trailing edges, andalong the front and rear edges, of the electrostatic latent image, 40 LEDs of Image EraseLamp LA3 are turned ON before development takes place, thereby reducing to aminimum the unnecessary potential on the surface of the PC Drum.

PC Drum Charge Corona

Image Erase Lamp LA3Exposure

1156M010AA

The position of LA3 can be adjusted using the adjusting screw at the front of the copier.

Copier Front Frame

Adjusting Screw

LA3 BoardCompressionSpring

Copier RearFrame

1156M011AA


M-20

The 40 LEDs are grouped as follows and turned ON and OFF according to the papersize and zoom ratio.

* In the full size mode, ON/OFF control is provided according to the paper size.* In any zoom ratio other than full size, the copier compares the number of LEDs thatare turned ON according to the paper size with the number that are turned ON accordingto the zoom ratio and uses the one that turns ON more LEDs.

*The zoom ratio is used to provide ON/OFF control of the LEDs if paper size is not inputin manual bypass copying, since the copier is unable to detect the paper size.

LED Group No. LED No. LED Group No. LED No.

0 LED1 16 LED 17

1 LED 2 17 LED 18

2 LED 3 18 LED 19

3 LED 4 19 LED 20

4 LED 5 20 LED 21

5 LED 6 21 LED 22

6 LED 7 22 LED 23

7 LED 8 23 LED 24

8 LED 9 24 LED 25

9 LED 10 25 LED 26

10 LED 11 26 LED 27 to 35

11 LED 12 27 LED 36

12 LED 13 28 LED 37

13 LED 14 29 LED 38

14 LED 15 30 LED 39

15 LED 16 31 LED 40

*The bigger the number, the nearer the LED is to the front side of the copier.


M-21

LA2 LEDs ON/OFF Pattern

Paper LED Group No.Zoom Ratio Width

(mm) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 31

91

92 99

100 107

108 116

117 126

127 135

136 142

0.522 143 149

0.523 0.550 150 158

0.551 0.576 159 166

0.577 0.610 167 173

0.611 0.642 174 184

0.643 0.672 185 195

0.673 0.698 196 203

0.699 0.728 204 211

0.729 0.758 212 220

0.759 0.776 221 229

0.777 0.806 230 235

0.807 0.830 236 244

0.831 0.854 245 251

0.855 0.882 252 258

0.883 0.914 259 267

0.915 0.938 268 277

0.939 0.964 278 284

0.965 0.990 285 292

0.991 293 298

= LED that turns ON


M-22

LA2 LEDs ON/OFF Pattern (Frame Erase, erase width 10mm)

Paper LED Group No.Width(mm) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30 31

105

106 113

114 121

122 130

131 140

141 149

150 156

157 164

165 172

173 180

181 188

189 198

199 208

209 217

218 225

226 234

235 243

244 249

250 258

259 265

266 272

273 281

282 291

292 298

299

= LED that turns ON


M-23

1151T20MCB


LA3 PWB-A PJ9A-1~6 Static ON/OFF Control 4-L


M-24

1156SBM1100A

OPTICAL SECTION11

As the Scanner is moved by Scanner Motor M2, the light from Exposure Lamp LA1 isreflected off the original and guided through the six Mirrors onto the surface of the PCDrum to form the electrostatic latent image.

18

1

2

5

7

6

8

9

10

1112

13

1415

16

17

7

34

7

1156M012AA

1. Scanner Reference Position Sen-sor PC81

2. Original Glass Cooling Fan MotorM5

3. Scanner4. Lens5. Scanner Motor M26. Scanner Shaft7. Mirror Motor M78. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage

9. 4th Mirror10. 5th Mirror11. 6th Mirror12. Lens Motor M613. AE Sensor Board PWB-H14. Exposure Lamp LA115. 1st Mirror16. 2nd Mirror17. 3rd Mirror18. 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage


M-25

1156SBM1101A

11-1. Exposure Lamp LA1

An AC halogen lamp is used as Exposure Lamp LA1.

As the exposure level is adjusted on the control panel, the duty ratio of the pulse of AVRRemote from PWB-A changes to increase or decrease the LA1 voltage, thereby chang-ing the image density.

In Photo mode, the voltages are varied on a level 3V (200V Areas: 6V) lower than themanual Exposure Lamp voltages.

Manual EXP Setting 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Mode 1 –8 –5 –2 –1 Reference +1 +2 +5 +8Lamp Voltage “Manual Level

Mode 2 –8 –6 –4 –2 Reference +2 +4 +6 +8Difference (V) Priority”

Mode 3 –8 –7 –6 –3 Reference +3 +6 +7 +8

1151T21MCBVaries dependingon the drawer.


AVR Remote

Signal (PWB-J)PWB-A PJ8A-13 L H 45-H


M-26

1156SBM1102A

11-2. AE Sensor

In the Auto Exposure Mode, the AE Sensor on AE Sensor Board PWB-H measures theintensity of the light reflected off the original, by sampling the black/white ratio of a210-mm-wide area of the original being measured. According to this measurement, theExposure Lamp voltage is automatically increased or decreased so that copies ofconsistent quality are produced.

The output from the AE Sensor is applied to PWB-A which, in turn, varies the duty ratioof the AVR Remote which varies the LA1 voltage accordingly.

Original Density (B/W Ratio) High Low

Intensity of Reflected Light Low High

PWB-H Output High Low

AVR Duty Increased Decreased

LA1 Voltage Increased Decreased


PWB-H(AE Sensor)

PWB-A PJ3A-2 Pulse output 12-B

AVR RemoteSignal (PWB-J)

PWB-A PJ8A-13 L H 45-H


M-27

1156SBM1103A

11-3. Lamp Reflectors

The Main Reflector ensures that light from Exposure Lamp LA1 exposes all areas of theoriginal. The Auxiliary Reflector functions to reflect light onto the areas that LA1 cannotilluminate when an original that does not lie flat on the Original Glass (such as a book)is being used. This reduces shadows which would otherwise be transferred to the copy.

The Main Reflector is of aluminum, while the Auxiliary Reflector is aluminum to whichfilm has been deposited. The same film as that used on the Auxiliary Reflector is affixedto both ends of the frame to compensate for the reduced intensity of light around bothends of the Exposure Lamp.

Auxiliary Reflector

Main Reflector

Exposure Lamp LA1

Auxiliary Reflector

1151M021AA

1156SBM1104A

11-4. Aperture Plates

Four Aperture Plates are moved to the front or rear to ensure even light distribution.

Aperture Plate

1139M035AA


M-28

1156SBM1105A

11-5. Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirror Carriage Movement

The Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage are moved by the Scanner Drive Cable fittedin the rear side of the copier. The Cable is driven by Scanner Motor M2.

Both the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage slide along the Scanner Shaft at the rearside. While at the front side, there is a Slide Bushing attached to the underside of eachof the bodies and that Bushing slides over the Slide Rail. The speed of the Scanner and2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage varies with different zoom ratios.

Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 detects the home position of the Scanner and2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. If they are not at the home position when the copier is turnedON, M2 is energized to move them to the home position.

2nd Mirrors Carriage

Scanner Shaft

Scanner Motor M2

Scanner ReferencePosition Sensor PC81

1156M013AA

1st Mirrors CarriageRear

Front


M-29

The Scanner starts the scan motion as a Scan signal is output from PWB-A. At the startof a scan motion and other heavy load conditions, Scanner Motor M2 requires a largeamount of current. The Current 1 or 2 signal from PWB-F is selected accordingly to varythe amount of current supplied to M2.

*The Current signal selection timing is controlled by software.

L M1 M2

Current 1 H L H

Current 2 H H L

Current M2>M1>L

Operation

When the scanspeed reaches a given level and dur-ing scan deceleration

At scan start and dur-ing return decelera-tion. (*)

At return start andduring return motion.(*)

* M2 is used at scan start of a small zoom ratio.

On receiving the Scan signal, Motor Drive Board PWB-F applies motor drive pulses,which are out-of-phase with each other, to M4. The motor speed is varied by changingthe width of the pulses applied to M2.

Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM

M2Scan Signal

PWB-F L H

M2Current

SwitchingSignal 1

PWB-F L H22-B

M2Current

SwitchingSignal 2

PWB-F L H

Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC81 PWB-F L H 18-E


M-30

1156SBM1106A

11-6. Lens Movement

The Lens is moved by the Lens Drive Cable which is driven by Lens Motor M6 (steppingmotor). The motor drive pulses sent from PWB-F drive M5 to move the Lens a givendistance, corresponding to the zoom ratio, from the reference position determined byLens Reference Position Sensor PC90.

There is a fixed-type Lens Aperture Cover provided at the rear of the Lens (on the 4thMirror end). It limits the amount of light striking the surface of the PC Drum.

Shaft

Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90

Lens Base Bracket

Lens ApertureCover

Spring

Lens Drive Cable

Lens Motor M5

Lens

Lens Aperture Cover

Cam

1156M014AB

1136M013AA

Lens


M6 PWB-F L H 19-A


PC90 PWB-F L H 18-D


M-31

1156SBM1107A

11-7. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Movement

The 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is moved to vary the conjugate distance for a particularzoom ratio by driving the rack-and-pinion gears at the front and rear ends of the mirrorusing Mirror Motor M7 (stepping motor).

Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC86 is used to control the position of the 4th Mirror.It ensures that the Mirror is located at the home position when the copier is turned ON.

PinionGear M7

Rack Gear

Mirror Motor M7

4th/5th Mirrors Carriage

4th/5th MirrorsGuide Plate

Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC86

1136M017AA


M7 PWB-F L H 19-B


PC86 PWB-F L H 18-C


M-32

1156SBM1108A

11-8. Original Glass Cooling Fan

Optical Section Cooling Fan Motor M5 draws outside air into the copier and blowsit against the Original Glass which is heated by lit Exposure Lamp LA1.

The Filter at the intake port of the Fan prevents dust and dirt from entering theOptical Section of the copier.

M5 turns only while Main Drive Motor M1 is being energized.

Rear of Copier

Filter

Front of Copier

Original Glass

Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5

1149M024AA


M5 PWB-A PJ15A-5 H L 21-H


M-33

1156SBM1200A

ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SENSORS12The five sensors fixed in the optical section receive the light reflected off the original todetermine the size of the original in the Auto Paper and Auto Size mode. (The imagedensity of the original, or OD, that can be detected is 0.6 or less.)

1156SBM1201A

12-1. Identification of Original Size Detecting Sensors

Original Size Detecting

Sensor FD1 PC116

1136M018AA

Original Cover Detecting Sensor PC111

Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 PC115

Original Size Detecting Sensor CD2 PC119

Size Reset Switch S108

Original Size Detecting Board UN2

Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 PC117

Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3 PC118

1156SBM1202A

12-2. Original Size Detecting Operation

Each photo receiver of the original size detecting sensors (PC115 to 119) respondsto reflected light of a given intensity with reference to the intensity of the light emittedby each LED. This allows the Original Size Detecting Board to determine whetheror not there is an original within a set distance.

1136M020AA

OriginalOriginal Glass

Set Distance

LEDPhoto Receiver


M-34

1156SBM1203A

12-3. Sensor Locations

The number and location of the Original Size Detecting Sensors vary depending onthe marketing area as shown below.

: Standard : Optional

SensorsAreas

CD1(PC115)

CD2(PC119)

FD1(PC116)

FD2(PC117)

FD3(PC118)

Metric Areas

Inch Areas

Hong Kong Area

NOTE: If the optional sensors are installed, set Jumper Connector JP2 on UN2 as illustrated below and run the F7 operation.

1136M022CA

FD1

A4C,A5L

B5C B5L A4L B4L A3L

CN1

JP1

JP2 CN2

CN3

CN4

Original Size Detecting Board UN2

Length (Metric)

LED1 LED2

Letter C Letter L

FLSLegal

FD2 FD3

11”17”Length (Inch)

Width (Metric)

A5L

B5L

A4L

B4L, B5C

A3L, A4C

CD2 CD1

Width (Inch)

Invoice

Legal,Letter L

Letter C,11”17”

L: Lengthwise;C: Crosswise

Position of JP1

FD1 is notmounted

Position of JP2

FD1 is mounted

CD2 and FD3are mounted

CD2 and FD3are not mounted


M-35

1156SBM1204A

12-4. Size Detection

Original Size Detecting Board UN2 reads the output data provided by the original sizedetecting sensors (PC115 to 119). By comparing the data from each sensor with thethreshold level, it determines whether there is an original placed on the Original Glass.UN2 then determines the size of the original according to the combination of the data.

Metric Area

FD1 FD2 FD3 CD1 CD2

OriginalSize

Size Determinedby UN2

LED2

LED1

LED2

LED1

LED2

LED1

LED2

LED1

A3L A3L (A3L) () () ()

B4L B4L (B4L) () () ()

A4L A4L (A4L) () () ()

A5L A5L (A5L) () () ()

A4C A4C (A4C) () () ()

Letter L:8-1/2”11”

Letter L (Letter L) () () ()

11”17” 11”17” (A3L) () () ()

Legal:8-1/2”14”

Legal (A4L) () () ()

FLS:8-1/2”13”

FLS (A4L) () () ()

Letter C:11”8-1/2”

Letter C (A4C) () () ()

No Original No Original () () ()

Inch Area

FD1 FD2 FD3 CD1

Original Size

Size Determinedby UN2

LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2

11”17” 11”17” (11”17”) () () ()

Legal: 8-1/2”14”

Legal (Legal) () () ()

Letter L: 8-1/2”11”

Letter L (Letter L) () () ()

Letter C: 11”8-1/2”

Letter C (Letter C) () () ()

FLS: 8-1/2”13”

FLS (Legal) () () ()

Invoice:5-1/2”8-1/2”

Invoice (No Original) () () ()

No Original No Original () () ()

*: Original Present : Original Not Present

*If no optional sensors are mounted, data is processed as indicated in ( ) and the originalsizes determined by UN2 are as indicated in ( ).

*UN2 does not use the data provided by LED1 of Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1(PC116) and LED2 of CD2 (PC119) for the determination of the original size.

*Any non-standard size is rounded off to the nearest standard size.


M-36

1156SBM1205A

12-5. Original Size Detection Timing

Master CPU on PWB-A affirms and resets the readings of the original size at the fol-lowing timings. Takes size readings: When the Original Cover is raised to an angle of 15° or more

(PC111 is deactivated). Affirms size readings: When the Original Cover is lowered to an angle of 15° or less

(PC111 is just activated); or, when the Start key is pressed with PC111 in the deacti-vated state.

Resets size readings: When the Original Cover is raised (S108 is deactuated).

Magnet

Size Reset Switch S108

Original Cover DetectingSensor PC111


PC111 PWB-A PJ17A-11 L H 21-G


S108 PWB-A PJ12A-1 L H 16-B


M-37

1156SBM1300A

DEVELOPING UNIT13

This copier employs the New Micro-Toning developing system. The toner fed upto the Sleeve/Magnet Roller is conveyed onto the points of development as theSleeve/Magnet Roller turns, thereby forming a visible, developed toner image ofthe original.

1156M015AA

1 2 3 4 56

7

8

9

10

111213

1415

1. Toner Bottle2. Developer Scattering Prevention

Mylar3. Developer Scattering Prevention

Plate4. Doctor Blade5. Sub Hopper Toner Supply Roller6. Toner Bottle Home Position Sen-

sor PC357. Toner Bottle Home Position De-

tecting Plate8. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing

Motor M8

9. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detect-ing Lever

10. Sub Hopper Toner Agitating Lever11. ATDC Sensor UN312. Developer Conveying/Agitating

Screw13. Bucket Roller14. Magnet Sheet15. Sleeve/Magnet Roller


M-38

1156SBM1301A

13-1. Developing Unit Drive Mechanism

Drive is transmitted from the copier to the Developing Unit by Coupling Gears 1 and2 when they mesh.

Coupling Gear 2 is spring-loaded. If the protruding part of Coupling Gear 1 makescontact with that of Coupling Gear 2 when the Developing Unit is slid into the copier,spring-loaded Coupling Gear 2 is pushed back toward the rear of the copier allow-ing the Developing Unit to be slid into position. When drive is later transmitted tothe Developing Unit, Coupling Gar 2 is pushed to the front by the tension of thespring to mesh positively with Coupling Gear 1.

1134M009AA

Coupling Gear 2

Coupling Gear 1

Main Drive Motor M1

Rear

Front


M-39

1156SBM1302A

13-2. Magnet Roller

The Magnet Roller of the Sleeve/Magnet Roller of this copier has the following magneticcharacteristics. Pole S3 before poles N1 and N2 at which development takes placeprovides a very weak magnetic force. If developer is compacted and clogs at the DoctorBlade and, as a result, part of the surface of the Sleeve/Magnet Roller is not covered withdeveloper, the nearby developer around S3 goes to those uncovered areas because ofthe weak magnetic force. This helps prevent white lines from occuring on the copy.

The magnetic flux density is maximized to allow the bristle to stand high and upright atpoles N1 and N2, at which development takes place. The positioning of these two likepoles together helps agitate the developer for greater uniformity, thus preventing whitelines from occurring on the copy.

The Sleeve Roller, onto which developer is attracted by the magnetic fields of force setup by the poles of the Magnet Roller, turns to convey the developer toward the point ofdevelopment. This means that developer fresh from the Developer Mixing Chamber isalways brought to the point of development.

The Imaging Unit integrates the Developing Unit with the PC Drum into one body.Because of that, it is impossible to move the Developing Unit against the PC Drum,thereby providing a certain distance between the PC Drum and Sleeve/Magnet Roller.The Magnet Roller has therefore been made movable: the Bushing is pressed bycompression springs thereby pressing the Positioning Collars on both ends of theMagnet Roller against the PC Drum. This ensures a given distance between the PCDrum and the Sleeve/Magnet Roller.

Movable Bushing

Compression Spring

Fixed Bushing

PC Drum 1156M016AA

N1

N2

N3

N4

S1

S2

S3


M-40

1156SBM1303A

13-3. Developing Bias

A negative voltage (Vb = Developing Bias voltage) is applied to the Sleeve Roller toprevent a foggy background on the copy. The amount of toner attracted onto the surfaceof the PC Drum depends on how much lower the PC Drum surface potential (Vi) is thanVb (i.e., the potential difference). When the potential difference is large, a greater amount of toner is attracted. When the potential difference is small, a smaller amount of toner is attracted.Because the Magnet Roller of this copier is movable, a flat spring is used as the BiasTerminal which follows the movement of the Magnet Roller.

Sleeve/MagnetRoller

Bias Connector

1151T01MCC

Bias Terminal

DS Collar

1134M018AA

Front

Varies depending onthe drawer.


Developing Bias PWB-A PJ13A-3 L H 3-F


M-41

1156SBM1304A

13-4. Doctor Blade

The Doctor Blade installed over the Sleeve/Magnet Roller regulates the height of thedeveloper brush on the surface of the Sleeve Roller. The Blade is perpendicular to thedirection of movement of the Magnet Roller to minimize variations in the distancebetween the Doctor Blade and Magnet Roller as the Magnet Roller moves.

Doctor Blade

Direction of MagnetRoller Movement

Magnet Roller

1156M017AA


M-42

1156SBM1305A

13-5. ATDC Sensor

The copier compares the toner-to-carrier ratio (T/C) of the developer in the DeveloperMixing Chamber detected by ATDC Sensor UN3 during a copy cycle with the referenceratio (6%) and, if it finds a lower ratio than the reference, replenishes the supply of toner.The standard output voltage of the ATDC Sensor for the reference T/C (6%) is 2.5V.

If the toner-to-carrier ratio becomes lower than 2.5% in a toner-empty condition, thecopier inhibits the initiation of a new copy cycle (this feature can be enabled or disabledby a Tech. Rep. Choice mode). As soon as a ratio of 3% or more is recovered, the copierpermits the initiation of a new copy cycle.

If the Front Door is swung open and closed with a T/C ratio of less than 3%, the copierinitiates an Auxiliary Toner Replenishing sequence. (The toner-empty condition iscanceled as soon as a T/C ratio of 3.5% is reached and the copier completes theAuxiliary Toner Replenishing sequence when the target level is reached.)

ATDC Sensor Automatic AdjustmentAn automatic adjustment of the ATDC Sensor is made in the F8 or FF Test Modeoperation.

*When F8 (or FF) is Run after Starter Has Been Changed:Following the execution of the starter setup mode, upon pressing the Start Key, thecopier CPU reads the output value of the ATDC Sensor and adjusts the ATDCSensor gain so that the output value becomes 2.5V.

NOTE: If an F8 (or FF) operation is run at a time when the starter has not been changed,it can result in a wrong T/C reference value being set by the copier. Avoid casualuse of F8.

If the setting value has been cleared because of the RAM Board being replaced,use the “Level History” function of the Tech. Rep. mode to return the “ATDC Ref.Value” to the original value before the board was replaced.

Controlled Part Control Signal T/C Ratio StandardOutput Voltage

WIRING DIA-GRAM

UN3 PJ11A-2B 6.0(%) 2.5(V) 1-J


M-43

<Toner Replenishing Control by ATDC Sensor>

The ATDC Sensor samples T/C for each copy and the copier compares the reading withthe reference T/C (which is normally 6% but may 7% depending on the imagestabilization control provided), energizing Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 asmay be necessary to replenish toner in either of the following four modes.

Toner Replenishing Mode Conditions Amount Replen-ished *

Large amount replenishing The ATDC Sensor reading is lower than

reference T/C by 0.5% or more.

Approx. 133 mg

Small amount replenishing The ATDC Sensor reading is lower than

reference T/C by less than 0.5%.

Approx. 66 mg

Fixed amount replenishing The ATDC Sensor reading is higher than

reference T/C by less than 1%.

Approx. 13mg

No toner replenishing The ATDC Sensor reading is higher than

reference T/C by 1% or more.

* The amount of toner replenished varies according to the paper size (given in the tableare figures for A4). The copier is also provided with a function that, if T/C detectedduring a copy cycle is lower than the reference by 2% or more, interrupts the copycycle and performs a toner replenishing sequence and, as soon as there is a gain of1% against the T/C reading, resumes the copy cycle. This function is, however, dis-abled when a toner-empty condition is detected and the ATDC Sensor is found faulty.

<Toner Replenishing Control by AIDC Sensor>

This copier is equipped with a function that switches from the ATDC Sensor, if it becomesdefective, to the AIDC Sensor to continue providing the toner replenishing control. Apattern is produced on the surface of the PC Drum for each copy between twosuccessive copies or after it has been fed out. The AIDC Sensor reads that pattern todetect the amount of toner sticking to it and the copier performs either of the followingtoner replenishing sequences depending on the output voltage of the AIDC Sensor.(Controlled target T/C: 6%; AIDC Sensor output voltage: DC4.25V)

Toner Replenishing Mode AIDC Sensor Output Volt-age

Amount Replenished *

Large amount replenishing Less than DC3.25V Approx. 129 mg

Small amount replenishing DC3.25V to less than 4.25V Approx. 64 mg

Fixed amount replenishing DC4.25V to less than 5.25V Approx. 13 mg

No toner replenishing DC5.25V or more

* The amount of toner replenished varies according to the paper size (given in the tableare figures for A4).


M-44

1156SBM1306A

13-6. Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism

Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 is energized for the toner replenishing timewhich is calculated based on the ATDC Sensor output voltage (T/C ratio) and the sizeof the paper being fed through the copier.

Sub Hopper TonerReplenishing MotorM9

Sub Hopper TonerSupply Roller

Bucket Roller

Developer Conveying/Agitating Screw

Sub Hopper

Sleeve/MagnetRoller

Rear of Copier

Front of Copier

1134M014AA


M9 PJ11A-2A L H 2-H


M-45

1156SBM1307A

13-7. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detection Control

A toner-empty condition in the Sub Hopper is detected by the magnet fitted to theSub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever and Sub Hopper Toner Empty SwitchS106.

The Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever rides on the eccentric cam fitted tothe rear of the Sub Hopper Toner Agitating Lever. It is moved up and down as theeccentric cam is turned by the drive transmitted from Main Drive Motor M1.

While the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper is higher than the predetermined level,the Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever rests on the toner and does not makethe up-and -down motion. S106 therefore remains deactuated.

When the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper is lower than the predetermined level,the Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever moves up and down by the eccentriccam. This result in S106 being actuated and deactuated. When the time S106 isactuated exceeds a predetermined value, the copier CPU determines that the SubHopper has run out of toner.

Sub Hopper TonerEmpty DetectingLever

Magnet

Eccentric Cam

Sub Hopper TonerEmpty Switch S106

1134M017AA1134M016AA

1134M015AA

Toner FullToner Empty

Controlled Part Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIA-GRAM

Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106 PJ11A-8B L H 2-L


M-46

1156SBM1308A

13-8. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism

Toner is supplied from the Main Hopper to Sub Hopper as follows. When a toner–

empty condition is detected in the Sub Hopper, it energizes Main Hopper Toner Re-

plenishing Motor M8 to turn the Toner Bottle.

The Home Position Detecting Plate fitted to the coupling and Toner Bottle HomePosition Sensor PC35 ensure that the Toner Supply Port in the Toner Bottle is posi-tioned at the top whenever the Toner Bottle is stopped.

Toner BottleToner Bottle

Coupling

1156M018AB

1136M034AA

Toner Supply Port

Toner Supply Hole

Main Hopper Toner Replenishing MotorM8

Home Position Detecting Plate

Toner BottleHolder

Toner Bottle HomePosition SensorPC35


M8 PJ11A-4A L H 2-H

Controlled Part Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC35 PJ11A-9B L H 2-K


M-47

1156SBM1309A

13-9. Swinging Out/In the Main Hopper

To replace an empty Toner Bottle, the user first needs to swing the Toner BottleHolder out 40° to the front. There is a flat spring installed on the Sub Hopper Holder,which causes the Toner Bottle Holder to click out of, and into, the locked position.

The Holder pivots about the Toner Supply Port as it is swung out or in, which effec-tively prevents toner from spilling when the Holder is swung out or in. The Couplingis provided with a locking mechanism that prevents the Toner Bottle from turningwhen it is removed or installed.

<When the Toner Bottle Holder is in Position> Since the flat spring fits into the front notch of the Toner Bottle Holder, the Holder

is locked in position. At this time, the bottom of the Coupling Lock Lever is pushedin by a part (*) of the Sub Hopper, keeping the Coupling free.

Rear

Front

1136M089AA

Flat Spring

Toner Bottle Holder

Coupling LockLever

<When the Toner Bottle Holder is Swung Out> The Toner Bottle Holder pushes the flat spring down and moves over it until the flat

spring then fits into the rear notch. This locks the Toner Bottle Holder in position.At this time, the Coupling Lock Lever is free and the spring acts to lock the Couplingin position with the Lock Lever.

Rear

Front

1136M035AA

Coupling

Toner Bottle

Coupling LockLever

Flat Spring


M-48

1156SBM1400A

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION14

Image Transfer

The Image Transfer Corona applies a DC negative corona emission to the underside ofthe paper thereby attracting the positively charged toner onto the surface of the paperto form a visible, developed image of the original. The Corona Unit is provided with aCorona Wire cleaning mechanism: the operator has only to pull out the Lever on whichthe Cleaner is mounted from the front of the copier, which cleans the Wire.

Paper Separation

The Paper Separator Corona showers the underside of the paper with both positive andnegative charges so that the paper can be easily separated from the PC Drum. Inaddition, two Paper Separator Fingers physically peel the paper off the surface of thePC Drum. (For details, see PAPER SEPARATOR FINGERS.)

The Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit is provided with a Pre-ImageTransfer Guide Plate that determines the angle at which the paper comes into contactwith the PC Drum and keeps an optimum distance between the paper and the PC Drumso that the image may be properly transferred onto the paper.

The Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit is grounded via a high capacity resis-tor, which improves its efficiency to discharge to the PC Drum side, thus reducing theoutput current from High Voltage Unit HV1.

Guide

Image Transfer CoronaWire Cleaner

Image TransferCorona Wire

Image Transfer/Paper Sep-arator Coronas Unit Rail

PC Drum

Cleaner Lever Cleaner

1136M054AA

Resistor

Pre-Image TransferGuide Plate

Paper SeparatorCorona Wire

Corona Housing

Reisitor


M-49

1151T07MCD


Image Transfer

CoronaPWB-A PJ13A-2 L H 3-F

Paper Separator

CoronaPWB-A PJ13A-3 L H 3-F

1156SBM1401A

14-1. Ozone Filter

Ozone produced by the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas is absorbed by theOzone Filter on the back of the copier. It is absorbed from the air being drawn out of thecopier through the Duct under the Suction Deck by Suction Fan Motor M4.

1136M056AA

(Front of Copier) To Ozone Filter

Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas

Duct


M-50

1156SBM1500A

PAPER SEPARATOR FINGERS15

After image transfer, an AC corona emission is applied to the underside of the paper bythe Paper Separator Corona to neutralize the paper so that it can be easily separatedfrom the PC Drum. To further ensure that the paper is positively separated from the PCDrum, there are two Paper Separator Fingers attached to the Imaging Unit. They physi-cally peel the paper off the surface of the PC Drum.

To prevent the Paper Separator Fingers from damaging the surface of the PC Drum, theyare kept in the retracted position whenever they are not at work. As illustrated below, theFingers are brought into contact with, and retracted from, the surface of the PC Drumby the Lever which is operated by Separator Solenoid SL1.

Finger Operating Lever

Pivot

Pawl (A)

Separator Solenoid SL1

PC Drum Paper Separa-tor Finger Shaft

Swash Plate Cam

ReturnSpring

PC Drum Paper SeparatorFinger

1136M064AA


M-51

<Paper Separator Finger Front-to-Back Moving Mechanism>

The Paper Separator Fingers are also moved over a given distance to the front and rearso that they will contact wider areas of the surface of the PC Drum, thus preventing local-ized damage to the PC Drum surface. The Swash Cam mounted on the Pivot Pin of the Finger Operating Lever is moved

through steps by means of the Ratchet wheel and SL1, causing the Swash Cam topush the Finger Shaft.

The lateral movement of the Paper Separator Fingers is 3.5 mm (which is equivalentto 60 times energization of SL1).

SL 1 Energized

Pawl (A) is raised.

The Swash Plate is lockedin position by Pawl (B). 1136M065AA

SL 1 Deenergized

Pawl (A) pushes the Swash Camdownward to turn it one notch.

Ratchet WheelSwash Cam

Paper Separator Finger Shaft

1136M067AA1136M066AA


M-52


SL1 PWB-A PJ11A-6A L H 2-I


M-53

1156SBM1600A

CLEANING UNIT16

The Cleaning Blade is pressed tightly against the surface of the PC Drum and scrapesoff any toner remaining on the surface after image transfer and paper separation havebeen completed.

Blade TensionSpring

Toner Conveying Coll

PC Unit

PC Drum Paper Separator Finger

1134M027AA

Cleaning Blade

The Cleaning Blade is moved back and forth to prevent the PC Drum from deterioratingand the Cleaning Blade from warping away from the surface of the PC Drum.

Timing Belt

Eccentric Cam

Blade Moving Pin

Cleaning Blade Assy Mounting Bracket

To Main Drive Motor M1 1134M028AA

Back Front


M-54

1156SBM1601A

16-1. Spent Toner Collection

(1) Toner Conveying/Collecting Mechanism

The toner which has been scraped off the surface of the PC Drum by the CleaningBlade is conveyed by the Toner Conveying Coil towards the rear of the copier and fallsinto the Toner Collecting Box at the back of the copier through the pipe.

The Toner Antispill Mylar is affixed under the Cleaning Blade to receive toner, thus pre-venting any toner from failing down onto the surface of the copy paper or the paperpath.

Toner Conveying Coil

1136M061AA

1136M062AA

Cleaning Blade

Toner Conveying Coil

Residual Toner

Toner Antispill Mylar

Spent Toner Flow

Toner Conveying Coil DriveGear (Copier)

Toner Conveying Coil DriveGear (PC Unit)

Pipe

The type of Toner Collecting Box and the method of detecting an installed box differbetween the applicable marketing areas. See the following table.

Areas Type of Box Box-in-PositionDetection

EP5000 All areasLarge-Capacity Toner

Collecting Box (in Cabinet)PC31 (in Cabinet)

U.S.A., Canada,

and Europe

Large-Capacity Toner

Collecting Box (in Cabinet)PC31 (in Cabinet)

EP4000

Other areasStandard Toner collecting Box (in

copier)PC107 (in Copier)


M-55

(2) Detection of Toner Collecting Box in Position

Provided inside the Paper Feed Cabinet (in the copier for EP4000 for the areas oth-er than the U.S.A., Canada, and Europe) is a Toner Collecting Box Set Sensor. Ifno box is installed, the sensor causes a warning message to appear on the TouchPanel and the initiation of a new copy to be inhibited.

1134M037EA1134M030AA

Toner

Pipe

ActuatorToner Collecting Box

Cabinet

(EP4000, except U.S.A., Canada, and Europe)

PC107Actuator

TonerCollectingBox

Pipe

TonerPWB-A

TonerCollectingBox SetSensor

Controlled Part Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC107 PWB-A PJ19A-9 L H 21-F


M-56

1156SBM1602A

16-2. Cleaning Bias (Optional)

* Except the U.S.A., Canada, and Europe

A Cleaning Bias Seal is optionally available that can be fitted to reduce damage to thePC Drum from acid paper.

Toner Antispill Mylar

PC Drum

Cleaning Bias Seal

1151T02MCD


Cleaning Bias HV1 L H 3-F


M-57

1156SBM1700A

MAIN ERASE LAMP17

Main Erase Lamp LA2 is turned ON to neutralize any surface potential remaining on thesurface of the PC Drum after cleaning.

Main EraseLamp Board

Filter

Main Erase Lamp LA2

1136M069AA

Main Erase Lamp LA2 consists of ten tungsten filament lamps mounted side-by-sideon a board. A filter is installed between LA2 and the PC Drum to protect LA2 from con-tamination.

1151T06MCD


LA2 PWB-A PJ12A-3 H L 1-L


M-58

1156SBM1800A

PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION18

The copier is equipped with two paper drawers that slide out to the front of the copier.The 1st Drawer is a fixed paper size type, while the 2nd Drawer is a universal paper sizetype.

1149M014AA

Paper Size Detecting Sensors Assy (CD)

Paper Size Detecting Switches Assy (FD)

Paper Take-Up Rolls

Paper Take-Up Unit Assy

2nd Drawer (Universal Paper Size Type)

1st Drawer (Fixed Paper Size Type)


M-59

1156SBM1801A

18-1. Drawer-in-Position Detection

When the drawer is slid into the copier, Drawer Set Detecting Lever A is pushed inthe direction of the arrow, which blocks the Drawer Set Sensor (PC61/PC62, goesLOW).

Rear

1st/2nd Drawer SetSensor PC61,62

4425M003AA

Front


PC61 PWB-A PJ22A-2 L H 25-P

PC62 PWB-A PJ22A-6 L H 25-P


M-60

1156SBM1802A

18-2. Drawer Paper Lifting/Lowering Mechanism/Control

(1) Metric Areas

The paper lifting mechanism raises the paper in the drawer so that the top of thepaper stack is pressed against the Paper Take-Up Roll at a constant pressure.

When slid into the copier, the drawer presses the Drawer Set Lever which engagesLift-Up Motor Gear 1 with Paper Lifting Arm Gear 2.

At the same time, the Drawer Set Sensor (PC61 /PC62) is blocked (goes LOW) andafter 1 msec., the Lift-Up Motor (M13/M14) starts turning, causing the Paper LiftingArm to raise the Paper Lifting Plate.

When the drawer is slid out, Lift-Up Motor Gear 1 is disengaged from Paper LiftingArm Gear 2, lowering the Paper Lifting Plate.

1st/2nd DrawerLift-Up MotorM13/14

Paper Lifting Arm

Gear 2Gear 1

4425M004AA

Rear

Front

When Drawer is Slid in

1st/2nd Drawer Lift -UpSensor (PC65/66)

4425M005AA

The Paper Lifting Arm further raises the paperafter the top sheet of paper is pressed againstthe Paper Take-Up Roll. As the light blockingplate blocks the Lift-Up Sensor (goes LOW), theLift-Up Motor (M13/M14) stops.


M-61

4425M006AA

4425M005AA

As sheets of paper are used, the Paper Take-UpRoll lowers accordingly, unblocking the Lift-UpSensor (PC 65/66 goes HIGH).

The Lift-Up Motor (M13/14) starts running, rais-ing the paper stack until the Lift-Up Sensor(PC65/66) is blocked (output goes LOW).

During Copying

Energizing and deenergizing of the Lift-Up Motor keeps constant the pressure be-tween the Paper Take-Up Roll and paper regardless of the height of the paperstack.


PC65 PWB-A PJ21A-2A L H 25-N

PC66 PWB-A PJ21A-2B L H 32-K


M13 PWB-A PJ18A-5 L H 25-M



M-62

(2) Inch Areas

<Paper Stack Lifting> When the Paper Descent Key (UN5/6) is pressed*1 after the drawer has been slid

into the copier, it energizes the Lift-Up Motor (M13/14) and the motor starts turningforward.

The rotation of the motor is transmitted via a gear train to the worm gear and thePaper Lifting Arm mounted on the same shaft, raising the Paper Lifting Plate. Thisraises the paper stack.

When the top of the paper stack is pressed against the Paper Take-Up Roll and thepaper stack is further raised, the light blocking plate of the Paper Take-Up Roll Assyblocks the Lift-Up Sensor (PC65/66). This deenergizes the Lift-Up Motor and thepaper stack raising motion is completed.

As the paper is consumed and the top level of the paper stack lowers, the Lift-UpSensor is unblocked. Then, the Lift-Up Motor is energized again to raise the paperstack until the Lift-Up Sensor is blocked again. This means that a constant pressureis maintained between the paper and the Paper Take-Up Roll regardless of theamount of paper still available for use.

*1:The Lift-Up Motor is energized at the following timings, in addition to the press of thePaper Descent Key (UN5/6).

Turning ON the Power Switch Opening and closing the door Operating the panel Detecting a sheet of paper on the Multi Bypass Table Detecting an original in the Duplexing Document

Feeder Raising and lowering the Original Cover, etc.

1st/2nd Drawer PaperLift-Up Motor M13/14

Paper Lifting Arm

1st/2nd Drawer Paper Descent Key UN5/6

Worm Gear

1134M032EA


M-63

Paper lifting timings are as follows

1st/2nd Drawer Lift-UpSensor PC65/66

4425M005AA

4425M006AA

4425M005AA

1136T63MCA

1136T64MCA

During Copying


Control Signal OFF ON WIRING DIAGRAM

UN5 PWB-A PJ24A-3 L H 41-I

UN6 PWB-A PJ24A-4 L H 41-M


M13 PWB-A PJ18A-5 L H 25-M (41-K)

M14 PWB-A PJ18A-7 L H 25-M (41-O)


M-64

<Paper Stack Lowering/Drawer Lock> Paper Stack Lowering

When the Paper Descent Key (UN5/6) is pressed or the drawer runs out of paperduring a copy cycle, the Lift-Up Motor (M13/14) is energized to turn backward.

The rotation of the motor is transmitted via a gear train to the worm gear and PaperLifting Arm mounted on the same shaft, lowering them.

When the Lower Limit Position Sensor (PC70/71) is blocked by the light blockingplate of the worm gear, it deenergizes the Lift-Up Motor (M13/14). This completesthe paper stack lowering motion (at a paper-empty condition).

When the Paper Descent Key (UN5/6) is pressed, the Lift-Up Motor is deenergizedwhen the Lower Limit Position Sensor (PC70/71) is unblocked after it has beenblocked. This unlocks the drawer. (For more details, see ”Drawer Locking Mecha-nism” that follows.)

1st/2nd Drawer Lower LimitPosition Sensor PC70/71

Light Blocking Plate1134M033EA

Drawer Locking Mechanism

Drawer Guide Frame

Lock Lever1134M034EA

Pressing the Paper Descent Key (UN5/6) starts thepaper lowering motion.

The worm gear is turned downward until its lightblocking plate has passed through and below theLower Limit Position Sensor (PC70/71), blockingand then unblocking it. This is so the worm gear canreach down low enough to push the Lock Leverdownward and unlock the drawer.

When the drawer is unlocked, the Drawer Spring inthe rear of the drawer pushes the drawer out to thefront approx. 70 mm.

Once the drawer is pushed out, the drawer Set Sen-sor (PC61/62) is unblocked. This reverses the Lift-up Motor (M13/14) and briefly turns the worm gearupward until its light blocking plate reblocks theLower Limit Position Sensor (PC70/71), returningthe Lock Lever to the locking position.

The Lock Lever on the bottom of the drawer con-tacts the Drawer Guide Frame of the copier andslides over the frame.

The drawer is locked in the copier when the Lock Le-ver drops into the slot in the Drawer Guide Frame.

1134M035ED

Drawer Spring


When Drawer isUnlocked


M-65

1156SBM1803A

18-3. Paper Level Detection

The amount of paper still available for use, or the paper level, of the 1st and 2ndDrawer is detected by 1st/2nd Drawer Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor PC67/68 and apulse disk.

The pulse disk is mounted on the shaft of the intermediary gear that transmits drivefrom the Lift-Up Motor (M13/14). The speed of the pulse disk varies with differentpaper levels and the number of pulses detected by the Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor(PC67/68) is used to determine the paper level.

Counting of the number of pulses is started when the Lift-Up Motor (M13/14) is en-ergized and continues until the output from the Lift-Up Sensor (PC65/66) goesLOW. The total number of pulses is translated into the amount of paper which isshown on the Touch Panel as a graphic marker in units of 50 sheets of paper.

As the paper is consumed and the top level of the paper stack lowers, the Lift-UpMotor is energized to raise the paper stack. During this time, the Lift-Up Motor PulseSensor (PC67/68) detects pulses and that pulse count is accumulated. When thecount reaches 50 sheets of paper, one segment of the paper level indicator on theTouch Panel goes out.

1 to 50 sheets

50 to 200 sheets

200 to 350 sheets

350 to 500 sheets

500 sheets up

1134M058AA

1134M059AA

1134M060AA

1134M061AA

1134M062AA

*Paper Level Indicator1st/2nd Drawer Lift-Up Motor M13/14

1st/2nd Drawer Lift-UpMotor Pulse SensorPC67/68

Pulse Disk

1134M020AA


PC67 PWB-A PJ23A-2 L H 32-I (41-K)

PC68 PWB-A PJ23A-5 L H 32-J (41-N)


M-66

1156SBM1804

18-4. Paper Empty Detection

(1) Metric Areas

A paper empty condition in the 1st and 2nd Drawers is detected by 1st Drawer Pa-per Empty Sensor PC101 and 2nd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor PC102, respec-tively, installed in the paper take-up area of each drawer.

When the drawer, with no paper loaded in it, is roughly slid out of the copier, thePaper Empty Lever can hit against the Paper Lifting Plate. To prevent this from oc-curring, the Paper Empty Lever is tilted in the direction of sliding.

Paper Lifting Plate

Paper Empty Lever

1st/2nd DrawerPaper EmptySensorPC101/102

4425M007AA

PC101/102 (blocked)

PC101/102 (unblocked)

4425M008AA

4425M009AA

The paper stack raises the Paper Empty Lever whichblocks PC101/102 (goes LOW).

The light blocking plate of the Empty Lever clearsPC101/102 which goes HIGH.

Paper Present

Paper not Present


PC101 PWB-A PJ23A-9 L H 32-J

PC102 PWB-A PJ23A-12 L H 32-K


M-67

(2) Inch Areas

A paper empty condition in the 1st and 2nd Drawers is detected by 1st Drawer Pa-per Empty Board PWB-E1 and 2nd Drawer Paper Empty Board PWB-E2, respec-tively, installed on the underside of the Paper Lifiting Plate.

The board is provided with a reflector type photosensor. When the drawer is loadedwith paper, the photosensor is activated by the light reflected off the paper. Thecopier then detects that there is paper in the drawer.

If no paper is loaded, the copier detects that the drawer is paper-empty and, at thesame time, the Lift-Up Motor (M13/14) starts turning backward to lower the PaperLifting Plate.

When a paper-empty condition is detected during a multi-copy cycle and if thereis another paper source (including options) loaded with paper of the same size andin the same direction, the copier automatically selects that second paper source toensure an uninterrupted copy cycle (Automatic Drawer Switching).

1st/2nd Drawer PaperEmpty Board PWB-E1/E2

1134M036EA


PWB-E1 PWB-A PJ23A-9 L H 42-L

PWB-E2 PWB-A PJ23A-12 L H 42-P


M-68

1156SBM1805A

18-5. Universal Tray (2nd Drawer) Paper Size Detection

The length (feeding direction) and width (crosswise direction) of the paper are inde-pendently detected and the copier determines the paper size by combining the twoseparate detections made. The “Universal Tray 13”x or 14x” function of “Tech. Rep.Choice” must be set for the width (CD) of FLS (13” or 14” long in the feeding direc-tion).

On the bottom of the tray is a lever fitted to the Trailing Edge Stop and another leverfitted to the Edge Guide. These levers actuate (activate) and deactuate (deacti-vate) the paper size detecting switches (and sensors) to allow the copier to deter-mine a particular paper size.

Detection in the Feeding DirectionPaper Size Detecting Switch Assy (FD)

S61/62 Cam

Tray Frame

S63/64 Cam

Trailing Edge Stop1149M015AA

Detection in the Crosswise Direction

Sensor Blocking Lever

Paper Size Detecting Sensor Assy (CD)

PC73 Lever

PC72 Lever

Lever Driving Pin

1149M016AAEdge Guide


M-69

Paper Size Detecting Switches/SensorsLength FD Width CD

PC73S62

PC72

S64

S63

S61

1149M017AA1149M018AA

Details of Paper Size Detecting Switches/Sensors Operation and Detectable Pa-per Sizes

Paper Size Detecting Switches/Sen-sors

Paper Size Name Inch Size CDFD(mm) Length (FD) Width (CD)

S61 S62 S63 S64 PC72 PC73

A5L (Invoice L)*2 (5-1/2”8-1/2”) 148210(140216) /

B5L 182257

B5C 257182

A4L 210297

A4C 297210

B4L 257364

A3L 297420

Quarto C 10”8” 254203

G.Letter L 8”10-1/2” 203267

G.Letter C 10-1/2”8” 267203

Folio* 8-1/4”13” 210330

Letter L 8-1/2”11” 216279

Letter C 11”8-1/2” 279216

Legal* 8-1/2”14” 216356

1114 11”14” 279356

Ledger 11”17” 279432

Comp Form 11”15” 279381

Korean FLS L 192268

FLS* 8”13” 203330

Hongkong FLS L* 8-1/2”13” 216330

G.Legal L* 8-1/2”13” 216330

Folio (Eu.)* 8-1/4”14” 210356

Switch operation : Actuated; : Deactuated Sensor operation : Blocked; : Unblocked*A Tech. Rep. Choice function must be set for the size in the crosswise direction.L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

*2Metric Areas: A5L Inch Areas: Invoice L


M-70

Control Signal Actuated Deactuated WIRING DIAGRAM

S61 PWB-A PJ26A-2 L H 25-J

S62 PWB-A PJ26A-4 L H 25-I

S63 PWB-A PJ26A-7 L H 25–I

S64 PWB-A PJ26A-9 L H 25-H


PC72 PWB-A PJ25A-2 L H 25-K

PC73 PWB-A PJ25A-5 L H 25-J


M-71

1156SBM1806

18-6. Paper Take-Up Mechanism

(1) Paper Take-Up Mechanism

The paper take-up and feeding mechanism takes up paper from the drawer andfeeds it to the Vertical Transport Roller.

The take-up mechanism is driven by 1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M11/12. Each paper take-up mechanism consists of a Paper Take-Up Roll, Feed Roll and

Separator Roll with torque limiter. The Separator Roll is controlled by the torque limiter so that it will not transport more

than one sheet of paper at a time.

Paper Feed Roll

Paper Separator Roll

Paper Take-Up Roll

Torque Limiter

2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M12

1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M11

4425M011AA


M-72

(2) Paper Separating Mechanism

The paper separating mechanism ensures that only the top sheet of paper is fedin by separating the second sheet of paper from the top one.

This is accomplished by the difference in friction coefficient between the first andsecond sheets of paper.

<Normal Feeding>

When only one sheet of paper is fed, the frictioncoefficient on the top side of the paper is equalto that on the underside.

Driven by the Feed Roll, the paper drives theSeparator Roll. This causes the paper to be sentto the Vertical Transport Section.

The friction coefficient varies for different ambi-ent conditions and types of paper being used,which often causes the Separator Roll to be sta-tionary.

Paper

Feed Roll

Separator Roll

4425M012AA

Driven or stationary

<Double Feeding>

Since the coefficient of friction between the topside of the first sheet of paper and the Feed Rollis greater than that between the first and secondsheets of paper, the first sheet of paper is fedinto the copier by the Feed Roll.

Feed Roll

1st sheetof Paper

2nd sheet of Paper

4425M013AA

Since the friction coefficient between the se-cond sheet of paper and the Separator Rollis greater than that between the first and se-cond sheet of paper, the Separator Roll is notdriven and holds the second sheet of paper.Separator Roll Stopped


M-73

(3) Paper Pressure Releasing Mechanism

If the drawer is pulled out while the paper is between the Feed Roll and the Separa-tor Roll, the paper is left in the copier. Removal of the paper is difficult. With thiscopier, sliding out the drawer automatically disengages the paper and Paper Take-Up/Feed Roll.

The Paper Pressure Releasing Mechanism makes it easier to remove a sheet ofpaper held between the Feed Roll and Paper Separator Roll by just sliding out thedrawer. When the drawer is pulled out, the pressure release rail pushes down theSeparator Roll Assy, disengaging the Feed Roll from the Separator Roll.

<Drawer in Position> <Drawer Slid Out>

Feed RollSeparatorRoll Assy

DrawerPressure Spring

Approx. 2mm

4444M004AA

(4) Paper Take-Up Roll Retraction Mechanism

When the drawer is slid out, the rear end of the drawer on the take-up side and thePressure Release Lever push up the Paper Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll, freeing the pa-per from the Paper Take-Up Roll.

PressureReleaseLever

Paper Take-UpRoll/Feed Roll Assy

1134M021AA

Front

Rear


M-74

1156SBM1807A

18-7. Drawer Paper Take-Up Control

(1) Paper Take-Up Motor Control

A stepping motor is used for the Paper Take-Up Motor (M11/12). Each motor isturned forward or backward by energizing its four internal coils using the pulse sig-nals output from Master Board PWB-A.

1134T14MCA

Main Drive Motor M9

Paper Transport ClutchCL2

1st/2nd Drawer PaperTake-Up Motor M11/12

1st/2nd Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor PC55/56

Vertical Transport SensorPC63/PC64

1st sheet of papertake-up start

2nd sheet of papertake-up start

T1: 5 msec. (Paper take-up off timer)T2: 5 msec. (Paper take-up interval timer)


PC51 PWB-A PJ19A-5 L H 32-M

PC55 PWB-A PJ19A-2 L H 32-N

PC56 PWB-A PJ21A-5A L H 25-N

PC63 PWB-A PJ21A-8A L H 25-O

PC64 PWB-A PJ21A-8B L H 32-M


M11 PWB-A PJ16A-1 Pulse output 25-K

M12 PWB-A PJ16A-2 Pulse output 25-L


M-75

(2) Paper Take-Up Retry Control

To minimize the occurrence of a paper misfeed due to a slippery Paper Take-UpRoll, the Paper Take-Up Motor (M11/12) is kept deenergized for a given period oftime before it is energized again, if a sheet of paper fails to reach the Paper Take-UpSensor (PC55/56) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the motor hasfirst been energized (paper take-up retry control).

A misfeed results if the sheet of paper does not reach the Paper Take-Up Sensoreven after three paper take-up sequences.

(3) Paper Take-Up Interval Control

The Paper Feed Roll and Separator Roll may sometimes fail to separate the subse-quent sheet of paper properly and the leading edge of that paper may be beyondthe Feed and Separator Rolls inside the copier. If the next paper take-up sequenceis started in this condition, the distance between the preceding and the currentsheet of paper will become shorter than normal, resulting in a misfeed.

To maintain a given paper take-up interval, therefore, this copier provides the fol-lowing control. If it takes the paper less than a specified time to block ([L]) PC55/56after M11/12 has been energized, M11/12 is temporarily deenergized and, an ap-propriate period of time thereafter, it is energized again (paper take-up interval con-trol).

(4) Double Feed Paper Take-Up Control

Even if the Paper Take-Up Roll takes up two sheets of paper at one time, the doublefeed paper take-up control uses the second sheet of paper for the next copy cyclewithout causing a paper misfeed. It eliminates a paper misfeed that would other-wise result when two sheets of paper are taken up at once.

If the second sheet of paper is stationary blocking PC55/56 when the trailing edgeof the first sheet of paper moves past Vertical Transport Sensor PC63/PC64, thecopier determines that it is a double feed condition and provides double feed con-trol.

If, however, the second sheet of paper has reached the Vertical Transport Roller,the double feed control is not provided since the paper is fed further into the copierby the Vertical Transport Roller. This could result in a paper misfeed or the secondsheet of paper being fed through the copier with the first one.

1149M019AB

Paper Path

PC56 Detection Point



PC54 Detection PointPosition of Leading Edge of 2nd Sheet of Paper

Double Feed Control

For Paper Feedingfrom 1st Drawer

(Not Provided)

(Provided)

For Paper Feedingfrom 2nd Drawer

(Not Provided)

(Provided)



M-76

1156SBM1900A

MULTI BYPASS TABLE19

Construction

The Multi Bypass Table fitted to the Right Door of the copier, is integrated into the copier.It is constructed as follows.

Paper Empty Sensor

1136M045AA

Lever Right Cover

Right Door Cover

Multi Bypass Table

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid

Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll

Paper Stoppers

Upper Transport Roller

Manual Bypass Feed Roll

Paper Empty Sensor

Manual BypassTake-Up Roll

Multi Bypass Table

Paper EmptySensor Actuator

Paper Stopper

Lower Transport Roller

Manual Bypass Separator Roll

1136M088AA


M-77

1156SBM1901A

19-1. Paper Take-Up Mechanism

The Paper Take-Up Rolls are normally in their raised (retracted) position so thatthey will not hamper proper loading of paper. When the Start Key is pressed, ManualFeed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4 is deenergized causing the Paper Take-UpRolls to press the paper stack downward and take up a sheet of paper.

Paper Stoppers are provided that block the leading edge of the paper stack as it isloaded on the Table, preventing any portion of the leading edge of the paper fromgetting inside. These Stoppers are unlocked at paper take-up, allowing paper intothe copier.

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3 controls the turning and stop of the PaperTake-Up Rolls.

Lock LeversIn Standby

At Take-Up

Lever

Rack Gear

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4

Paper Take-Up Rolls

Paper Stoppers


M-78

1151T12MCE


CL3 PWB-A PJ15A-12 L H 32-P

SL4 PWB-A PJ15A-9 L H

SL4 PWB-A PJ15A-10 L H32-P

1156SBM1902A

19-2. Paper Separating Mechanism

The paper separating mechanism ensures that only the top sheet of paper is fedin by separating the second sheet of paper from the top one. This is accomplishedby the Torque Limiter fitted to the Separator Roll shaft which stops the SeparatorRoll when there is a change in friction between the Feed and Separator Rolls.

*For details of the paper separating mechanism, see ”18. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SEC-TION.”


M-79

1156SBM1903A

19-3. Paper Empty Detection

The Multi Bypass Table is equipped with Manual Feed Paper Empty Sensor PC51which detects a sheet of paper at the manual bypass port.

Manual Feed PaperEmpty Sensor PC51

Actuator

Paper Stopper

Paper Take-Up Roll


PC51 PWB-A PJ15A-14 H L 32-O


M-80

1156SBM2000A

VERTICAL PAPER TRANSPORT20

The sheet of paper taken up by the Paper Take-Up Roll from the Drawer is fed alongthe Paper Guide to the Vertical Transport Rollers. The paper fed by the VerticalTransport Rollers reaches the Transport Rollers and is then fed up to theSynchronizing Rollers. The Transport Rollers are turned and stopped by PaperTransport Clutch CL1. The Transport Rollers are coupled to the Vertical TransportRollers by way of gears, meaning that the Vertical Transport Rollers are turned andstopped in time with the Transport Rollers. Transport Roller Sensor PC54immediately after the Transport Rollers detects a sheet of paper fed from theVertical Transport Section or Manual Bypass Table.

A Paper Dust Remover is fitted to one of the Transport Rollers, collecting paper dust fromthe rollers.

The Cover for the Vertical Transport Section (i.e., the Side Door) can be opened andclosed for clearing misfeeds. Right Upper Door Interlock Switch S22 detects wheth-er or not this Cover is open.

<Control>

Transport Rollers

Transport RollerSensor PC51

Right Upper Door In-terlock Switch

Vertical Transport Rollers/Rolls

1151T10MCC

1156M019AA


CL1 PWB-A PJ14A-2 L H 7-F




M-81

1156SBM2100A

SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS21

The Upper Synchronizing Roller is a metal roller covered with a polyvinyl chloride tub-ing. It is secured to the front and rear frames of the copier.

The Lower Synchronizing Roller, a rubber roller, is fitted to the Transport Assy. Pivot-ing about its rear end, the Lower Roller can be swung downward to facilitate clearingpaper misfeeds.

Upper Synchronizing Roller

Lower Synchronizing Roller

1136M050AA

Paper Dust Remover

Guide Plates


Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55


Torsion Spring

1136M051AA


M-82

1156SBM2101A

21-1. Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism

The Upper Synchronizing Roller receives drive from Main Drive Motor M1 via a geartrain and timming belt. The Upper Roller drives the Lower one.

Upper Synchronizing Roller Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2

To Main Drive Motor M1

Timing Belt

1136M052AA

1156SBM2102A

21-2. Paper Dust Remover

The Paper Dust Remover is installed so that it makes contact with the UpperSynchronizing Roller. Since the Upper Synchronizing Roller is covered with a vinyltubing, triboelectric charging occurs as the Roller turns in contact with the PaperDust Remover. As paper is then fed between the Synchronizing Rollers, thecharges on the tubing attract paper dust from the paper. The dust is then transferredonto the Paper Dust Remover.The Paper Transport Rollers are also provided with a paper Dust Remover.


1136M026AA

Paper Dust Remover



M-83

1156SBM2103A

21-3. Synchronizing Roller Control

The Synchronizing Rollers are started as Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 isenergized upon reception of a signal from PWB-A.

1151T11MCD


CL2 PWB-A PJ14A-4 L H 7-G


PC55 PWB-A PJ19A-2 L H 32-N


M-84

1156SBM2104A

21-4. Prevention of Low Image Density on Copy

During conditions of high humidity when the paper is damp, charges tend to flowfrom the Image Transfer Corona through the paper and guide plates to the ground.This results in low image density on the copies. To prevent this from occuring, aplastic spacer is installed between the copier frame and each guide plate aroundthe Synchronizing Rollers so that it remains insulated. Instead of using the plasticspacer, an electrodeposition coating has been applied to some of those guideplates. If, however, the resistance with the ground is made infinity, the guide platewould build up charges and a spark could occur with other guide plates, resultingin a malfunction. To prevent this, a resistor and a varistor are connected to the guideplates. The guide plates are connected by flat springs as illustrated below.

Upper VerticalTransport Rollers

1136M053AA

Varistor

Resistor

Manual BypassFeed/Separator Rolls

Transport Rollers

Synchronizing Rollers

No. Guide Plate Name Insulation Method

Upper Pre-Synch Guide Plate Plastic Spacer

Lower Pre-Synch Guide Plate Plastic Spacer

Upper Transport Roller Guide Plate None [Fitted to top of guide plate no. ]

Lower Transport Roller Guide Plate Plastic Spacer

Manual Bypass Guide Plate Electrodeposition Coating

Vertical Transport Guide Plate Plastic Spacer

Pre-Image Transfer Guide PlateFitted to plastic holder of Image Transfer/Pa-per Separator Coronas


M-85

Flat Spring Connection

A Between varistor-and-resistor and guide plate

B Between varistor-and-resistor and guide plate

C Between guide plates and

D Between guide plates and

E Between guide plates and


M-86

1156SBM2200A

PAPER TRANSPORT22

Suction Fan Motor M4 draws the paper onto the turning Suction Belts. It also pulls thepaper down as it reaches the Pre-Fusing Guide Plate to ensure that the paper issmoothly fed into the Fusing Unit.

As M4 turns, ozone produced by the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas isabsorbed by the Ozone Filter from the air being drawn out of the copier.

Ozone Filter

1136M070AA

Suction Belts

Transport Section Release Lever

Suction Drive Gear

Suction Fan

Controlled Part Control Signal Half SpeedRotation

Full SpeedRotation WIRING DIAGRAM

M4 PWB-A PJ15A-4 L H 21-G


M-87

1156SBM2201A

22-1. Suction Belt Drive Mechanism

The Suction Belts are driven by Main Drive Motor M1 through a timing belt and gear train.

Suction Belt Drive Roller

1136M072AAMain Drive Motor Gear

Suction Belt

Suction Drive Gear

Timing Belt




M-88

1156SBM2300A

FUSING UNIT23

The Upper Fusing Roller and Lower Fusing Roller together apply heat and pressureto the toner and paper to permanently fix the developed image to the paper.

Drive for the Upper Fusing Roller is transmitted from the Main Drive Motor to theUpper Fusing Roller Drive Gear. The Lower Fusing Roller and Cleaning Roller aredriven by the respective Rollers in contact with them.

Pressure Spring

Thermistor TH1/2

Fusing Heater Lamp H1

Upper Fusing Roller

Lower Fusing Roller

Fusing ThermoswitchTS1

Lower Fusing PaperSeparator Finger 1156M020AA

1136M073AA

Cleaning Roller

1st Paper Exit Roller

Upper Fusing PaperSeparator Finger

Cleaning Roller

Cleaning Roller Drive Gear

Upper Fusing RollerDrive Gear

Upper FusingRoller

Lower FusingRoller

Main Drive Motor M1


M-89

1156SBM2301A

23-1. Fusing Temperature Control

The Upper Fusing Roller is heated by Fusing Heater Lamp H1 which is an AChalogen lamp. Fusing Thermistor 1 TH1 and Thermistor 2 TH2 installed on theUpper Fusing Roller helps keep the optimum fusing temperature.

The fusing temperature is normally controlled at 200°C during a copy cycle and at 190°Cin the standby state. To ensure good fusing performance even when the Lower FusingRoller remains cool immediately after warm–up in the early morning, the temperatureis controlled as follows when the copier is turned ON.

Temperature is controlled at 200°C for one hour after the copier has completedwarming up, which is followed by a temperature control at 190°C.

If a copy cycle is started while the temperature is being controlled at 190°C, the tempera-ture control at 200°C begins. As soon as the copy cycle is completed, control is againswitched to 190°C.

TH1 is positioned at a point 30.5 mm from the paper path reference position, there-by preventing offset caused by low temperature and degraded fusing performancefor small-size paper.

The control temperature in the Energy Saving Mode is 155°C. With EP5000, thecontrol temperature is 180°C in the Energy Saving Mode.

Fusing Thermoswitch TS1, installed above the Upper Fusing Roller, cuts off thepower to the Fusing Unit if the temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller becomesexcessively high. It eliminates the possibility of a fire that could occur when H1remains ON due to a faulty temperature control circuit.

1151M012CA

1 hour after Power Switch ON

EP5000 Energy Saving ModeDuring Copy Cycle

In Standby State

Copying E

nabled

Energy S

aving Mode O

FF

In EnergySaving Mode

Energy S

aving Mode O

N

Copy C

ycle Started

Copying E

nabled

During Predrive

Pow

er Sw

itch ON

Copy C

ycle Com

pleted

EP4000 Energy Saving Mode

200C190C180C165C155C


M-90

<Fusing Temperature Control During Continuous Small-Size Paper Feeding>

When a number of sheets of small-size paper are fed through the copier continuously,the temperature of the rear end of the Fusing Rollers tends to rise, resulting in a high-temperature offset occurring. Fusing Thermistor TH2 is installed at a location 271.5mm from the position of paper passage registration. As soon as TH2 detects 225°C,the 225°C control by TH2 is started.

1156SBM2302A

23-2. Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism

Pressure springs are fitted to the Pressure Holder for the Lower Fusing Roller on thefront and rear ends. When the pressure screws are tightened, it moves the PressureHolder upward, thus allowing the Lower Fusing Roller to be pressed tightly up againstthe Upper Fusing Roller.

Upper Fusing Roller

Pressure Screw

Pressure Holder

Pressure Spring

Lower Fusing Roller

1136M075AA

Rear

Front


M-91

1156SBM2303A

23-3. Oil Roller/Cleaning Roller

The Cleaning Roller is pressed up against the Upper Fusing Roller, applying a coat ofsilicone oil to the surface of the roller. At the same time, it turns in the direction oppositethat of the Upper Fusing Roller and, with its brush, removes toner and paper dust.

1136M077AA

Cleaning Roller

Upper Fusing Roller

Lower Fusing Roller


M-92

1156SBM2304A

23-4. Paper Separator Fingers

Each of the two Fusing Rollers is provided with Paper Separator Fingers that strip thepaper from the surface of the Rollers.

Upper Fusing Paper Separator Fingers The Upper Fusing Paper Separator Fingers have been coated with teflon so that they

will not be contaminated with toner. The tip of each Separator Finger is at all times pressed against the surface of the Upper

Fusing Roller by a pressure spring.

1136M078AA

Upper Fusing Roller

Upper Fusing PaperSeparator Finger

Rear

Front

Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers The Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are flat springs to enhance paper separat-

ing performance and ensure that the paper would not become wedged if a misfeed oc-curs.

Lower Fusing PaperSeparator Finger

Fusing Lower Guide/Lower FusingPaper Separator Fingers Assy

Exit Unit 1156M021AA


M-93

1156SBM2305A

23-5. Fusing Section Cooling Fan Motor

Fusing Section Cooling Fan Motor M15 prevents the temperature in the optical sectionfrom being raised inordinately by the heat of the Fusing Unit in the standby state.M15 remains energized while the copier is in the standby state and deenergized duringa copy cycle.

M15

Fusing Unit

1156M022AA


M15 PWB-A PJ10A-2 L H 3-D


M-94

1156SBM2400A

EXIT UNIT24

Drive from the Fusing Unit is transmitted via a gear train to turn the 1st/2nd Paper ExitRollers.

Left Door

1136M081AA

1st Paper Exit Roller

Drive Gear

Exit/Duplex SwitchingPlateExit/Duplex

Solenoid SL5

Paper ExitSwitch S53

Main Control Board PWB-A outputs a signal to energize Exit/Duplex Switching SolenoidSL5, which switches the position of the Exit/Duplex Switching Plate. The Unit has PaperExit Switch S53 built into it which detects a sheet of paper being fed out of the Unit. (Formore details of switching control, see the Service Manual for “DUPLEXING UNIT”).

1139M082AA

Exit/Duplex Switching Plate

Exit/Duplex Switching Solenoid SL5

Paper Exit Roller/Rolls

Paper Exit Switch S53


S53 PWB-A PJ14A-8 L H 3-D


SL5 PWB-A PJ14A-6 L H 3-C


M-95

1156SBM2401A

24-1. Left Upper Door Interlock Switch S23

Left Upper Door Interlock Switch S23 fitted to the copier body detects the Left UpperDoor when closed. The Exit Unit is fitted to the Left Upper Door.

When the Left Upper Door is closed, the rib on the Exit Unit pushes the Lever, whichactivates S23.

Left Upper Door

2nd Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear

Left Upper DoorInterlock Switch S23

Lever

1156M023AA




M-96

1156SBM2500A

DEHUMIDIFYING SWITCH25

To prevent image transfer efficiency from being reduced due to damp paper inhighly humid weather, Paper Dehumidifying Heater H3 (Optional) is installed on thebase frame of the copier under the 2nd Drawer.

Drum Dehumidifying Heater H2 (Standard) is located under the LowerSynchronizing Roller to prevent the PC Drum from forming condensation.

Copier Base FrameDrum DehumidifyingSwitch S3

Lower Synchronizing RollerPaper Dehumidifying Heater H2(Optional)

Paper Dehumidifying Switch S12

1136M004AA1136M043AA

Drum DehumidifyingHeater H3 (Stan-dard)

H2, H3 ON/OFF Conditions

Dehumidifying Switch ON

Power cord Plugged in Power Switch ON *During a copy cycle

H2 ON OFF OFF

H3 ON ON OFF

*During a copy cycle: Refers to the period of time between when the Start Key is pressedand when Main Drive Motor M1 is deenergized.


M-97

1156SBM2600A

MEMORY BACKUP26

IC1 (RAM) of RAM Board PWB-R connected to Main Control Board PWB-A storesthe setting/adjustment values set in the Tech. Rep. Modes as well as the countercounts. Backup Battery BAT1 is mounted on PWB-R to prevent the contents ofmemory from being lost when the power cord is unplugged or PWB-R removed fromthe copier. BAT1 requires a voltage of 2V or more to retain the contents of memory.

ImportantAs we noted above, the RAM stores critical data. If PWB-R has been replaced witha new one, memory must first be cleared and then all settings be made again. Itshould also be noted that PWB-R should not be replaced at the same time whenPWB-A is replaced.


Copyright1997 MINOLTA Co., Ltd.

Printed in Japan

Use of this manual shouldbe strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

1156-7991-11 97046000

1156SBG000E

Interleaf EP5000/EP4000 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT97.04.01

1156SBD000AA


i

1151SBD0000A

For the Utmost safety

For replacement parts, use the genuine parts with their part numbers specified in the parts manual. Use

of a wrong part could cause an overload or dielectric breakdown resulting in an electric shock or fire.

Replace a blown fuse or thermal fuse with the corresponding genuine part with its part number specified

in the parts manual. Use of a fuse with a different rating or one with the same rating but of a different

type can result in a fire.

Especially when a thermal fuse blows frequently, the thermal control system is probably faulty.

Be sure to take necessary action.

Before attempting to disassemble the machine, be sure to unplug its power cord. The machine contains

a high voltage unit and a circuit with a large current capacity that may cause an electric shock or burn

from sparking.

The machine also contains quick moving parts, which could injure a person.

If the machine uses a laser, a person can lose his/her eyesight by a laser beam leak.

Wherever feasible, keep the covers and parts mounted when energizing the machine.

If it is absolutely necessary to energize the machine with its cover removed, do not touch an exposed

part that is being charged and use care not to allow your clothing to be caught by a timing belt, gear,

or other moving part.

Do not leave the machine unattended while it is being energized.

Warning!

To actuate an interlock switch with a cover removed or opened, be sure to use the interlock switch actu-

ating jig. Use of folded paper can damage the interlock switch mechanism.

Caution!


ii

A high voltage is being applied to the part marked with the symbol shown

on the right. Touching it can cause an electric shock. Be sure to unplug the

power cord when servicing this part or other parts near it.

When the machine is energized with any of its covers removed, never use a flammable spray near it,

as a fire can result.

Make sure that correct screws (diameter and length of the screw, binding/tapping screws) are used in

the correct places when assembling parts. If a wrong screw is used, a short insulating distance could

result. It could also result in collapsed threads, which provides only a poor grounding connection, result-

ing in an electric shock.

A toothed washer and spring washer, if used originally, must be reinstalled. If they are left out, a contact

failure results, causing an electric shock or fire.

Replace a lithium cell only with one having the part number specified in the parts manual. An explosion

could result if the cell is installed with wrong polarity or a wrong cell is installed.

Dispose of a used lithium cell according to the applicable local regulations. Never throw it away or aban-

don it on the user’s premises.

Caution!

Other Precautions While the machine is being energized, do not unplug or plug in a connector on a PWB or relay harness.

Since the Magnet Roller of the Imaging Unit generates a strong magnetic force, do not bring a CRT, watch,

floppy disk, or magnetic card near it.

Use of an air gun or vacuum generates static electricity which can cause the ATDC Sensor and associated

parts to break down. Be sure therefore to use a blower brush or cloth to clean these parts. If a unit is to

be cleaned, be sure to remove the sensors in advance.

MOS lCs are susceptible to static electricity. When handling a PWB loaded with MOS ICs, follow precau-

tions given in “INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs WITH MOS ICs.”

The PC Drum is highly delicate. When handling the PC Drum, follow the precautions given in “HANDLING

OF THE PC DRUM.”

To reassemble, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified.

Note that replacement of a PWB may call for readjustments or resetting of particular items.

CAUTION: DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE

ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.

ADVARSEL!:Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med

batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugle bafferi tilbage til leverandoren.


iii

1156SBD000BA

CONTENTS

SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS1

1-1. PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY/ADJUSTMENTS D-1. . . . . . 1-2. INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs

WITH MOS ICs D-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3. HANDLING OF THE PC DRUM D-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED D-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY2

2-1. DOORS, COVERS, AND EXTERIOR PARTS:IDENTIFICATION AND REMOVAL PROCEDURES D-6. . . . . . . . .

2-2. REMOVAL OF CIRCUIT BOARDS D-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3. PAPER TAKE-UP/TRANSPORT SECTIONS D-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Unit D-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy and

Separator Roll Assy D-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Roll, Feed Roll,

and Separator Roll D-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Cleaning of the Vertical Transport Rollers D-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Removal of the Drawers D-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Removal of the Upper Synchronizing Roller D-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Cleaning of the Upper and Lower Synchronizing

Rollers D-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Replacement of the Paper Dust Remover D-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Cleaning of the Paper Dust Remover D-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Removal of the Suction Unit D-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (11) Disassembly of the Suction Unit D-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (12) Disassembly of the Multi Bypass Unit D-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-4. OPTICAL SECTION D-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Cleaning of the Original Glass D-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Cleaning of the Scanner Shaft D-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Cleaning of the Scanner Rail D-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Removal of the Scanner D-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Cleaning of the Exposure Lamp D-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Removal of the Thermal Fuse D-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Cleaning of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd Mirrors D-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Cleaning of the Lens and 4th and 5th Mirrors D-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Winding of the Lens Drive Cable D-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Removal of Scanner Motor M2 D-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (11) Removal of the Scanner Drive Cable D-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (12) Winding of the Scanner Drive Cable D-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (13) Cleaning of the 6th Mirror Protective Filter D-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . (14) Cleaning of the Cooling Fan Filter D-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


iv

CONTENTS2-5. IMAGING UNIT D-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Removal of the Imaging Unit D-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Disassembly of the Imaging Unit D-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Replacement of the PC Drum D-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Cleaning of the Developer Scattering Prevention Plate D-42. . . . (5) Cleaning of the Ds Positioning Collars D-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Trap D-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Cleaning of the Cleaning Blade D-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Replacement of the Cleaning Blade D-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Replacement of the Starter D-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Cleaning of the AIDC Sensor Board D-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (11) Cleaning of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers D-46. . . . . . (12) Replacement and Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Seal

and Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Plate D-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (13) Removal of Main Erase Lamp LA3 D-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (14) Cleaning of the Main Erase Lamp Filter D-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (15) Cleaning of Image Erase Lamp LA2 D-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (16) Replacement of Image Erase Lamp LA2 D-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (17) Removal of the Ozone Filter

(PC Drum Charge Corona) D-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (18) Removal of the Ozone Filter

(Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas) D-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . (19) Removal of the Toner Collecting Box D-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-6. PC DRUM CHARGE CORONA AND IMAGE TRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS D-49. . . . . .

(1) Removal of the PC Drum Charge Corona D-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Housing D-49. . . . . . . . (3) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Grid Mesh D-50. . . . . . (4) Cleaning of the Comb Electrode D-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Removal of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator

Coronas D-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Cleaning and Replacement of the Image Transfer

Corona Wire D-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Cleaning and Replacement of the Paper Separator

Corona Wire D-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Cleaning of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator

Coronas Housing D-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Cleaning of the Lower Pre-Image Transfer

Guide Plate D-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7. FUSING UNIT D-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Removal of the Fusing Unit D-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Disassembly of the Fusing Unit D-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Replacement and Cleaning of the Upper Fusing Paper

Separator Fingers D-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Cleaning of the Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers D-58. . . . (5) Cleaning of the Fusing Unit Entrance Guide Plate D-58. . . . . . . . .


v

CONTENTS(6) Cleaning of Fusing Front and Rear Thermistors TH1/2 D-58. . . . (7) Cleaning of Fusing Thermoswitch TS1 D-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Replacement and Cleaning of the Cleaning Roller D-59. . . . . . . . (9) Replacement and Cleaning of the Upper Fusing

Roller D-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Replacement and Cleaning of the Lower Fusing

Roller D-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8. EXIT UNIT D-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Removal of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit D-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ADJUSTMENT3

3-1. JIGS AND TOOLS USED D-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2. ADJUSTMENT REQUIREMENTS LIST D-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3. ADJUSTMENT OF SWITCHES D-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjustment of Front Door Interlock Switch S21 D-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4. ADJUSTMENT OF BELT TENSION D-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Paper Take-Up Unit Timing Belt D-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Developing Unit Timing Belt D-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Fusing Unit Timing Belt D-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) I/U Timing Belt D-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5. ACCESSING THE TECH. REP. MODE ANDADJUST MODE D-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6. ELECTRICAL/IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS D-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Initial Adjustment of Original Size Detecting Board D-68. . . . . . . . (2) ATDC Adjustment D-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Adjustment of the Aperture Blades D-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto

Exposure Mode D-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Adjustment of Optimum Exposure Setting in the Manual

Exposure Mode D-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Adjustment of Zoom Ratio in the Crosswise Direction D-75. . . . . (7) Adjustment of Zoom Ratio in the Feeding Direction D-77. . . . . . . (8) Adjustment of Reference Position of the Multi

Bypass Table D-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Adjustment of Reference Position of the 1st/2nd

Drawer D-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration D-81. . . . . . . . . . .

(1)Leading Edge Registration in Full Size Mode D-81. . . . . . . . . (2)Leading Edge Registration in Enlargement Mode D-83. . . . . (3)Leading Edge Registration in Reduction Mode D-85. . . . . . . .

(11) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration for BookSecond Page D-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(12) Adjustment of the Image Leading Edge Erase Width D-89. . . . . (13) Adjustment of the Image Trailing Edge Erase Width D-91. . . . . . (14) Adjustment of Edge Erase D-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


vi

CONTENTS3-7. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS D-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Focus-Positioning of the Scanner and MirrorsCarriage D-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(2) Adjustment of the Gap Between the Doctor Blade andSleeve Roller (D.B. Adjustment) D-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(3) Adjustment of the PC Drum Paper Separator FingerPosition D-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(4) Adjustment of Manual Feed Paper Take-Up SolenoidSL4 D-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(5) Adjustment of Exit/Duplex Solenoid SL5 D-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MISCELLANEOUS4

4-1. INSTALLATION OF THE PLUG-IN COUNTER (OPTION)MOUNTING BRACKET D-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2. ADJUSTMENT OF THE RIGHT DOOR D-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


D-1

1139SBD0100A

SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS11151SBD0101B

1-1. PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY/ADJUSTMENTSObserve the following precautions whenever servicing the copier.

Be sure to unplug the copier from the outlet before attempting to service the copier. The basic rule is not to operate the copier anytime during disassembly.

If it is absolutely necessary to run the copier with its covers removed, use care not to allow your clothingto be caught in revolving parts such as the timing belt and gears.

Be sure to use the Interlock Switch Actuating Jig whenever it is necessary to actuate the Interlock Switchwith the covers left open or removed.

Do not plug in or unplug print jacks on the Board or connect or disconnect the Board connectors whilepower is being supplied to the copier.

Do not use flammable spray around the copier in operation. The Magnet Roller of the Imaging Unit generates strong magnetic force. Do not bring it near a cathode-ray

tube or watch. The lithium cell in RAM Board PWB-R can burst. At replacement, make sure of the correct polarity and

do not change it or create a closed circuit.A used lithium cell should be disposed of according to the local regulations and never be discarded casual-ly or left unattended at the user’s premises.

Do not use an air gun or vacuum cleaner for cleaning the ATDC Sensor and other sensors, as they cancause electrostatic destruction. Use a blower brush and cloth. If a unit containing these sensors is to becleaned, first remove the sensors from the unit.

When handling the PWBs with MOS ICs, observe “Instructions for Handling the PWBs with MOS ICs.” When handling the PC Drum, observe precautions given in “Handling of the PC Drum.” Note that replacement of a PWB may call for readjustments or resetting of particular items. Use the right screw in the right place at reassembly. Note that some are longer and some are thicker than

others. A toothed washer is used with the screw that secures the ground wire to ensure positive conduction. Do

not forget to insert this washer at reassembly. To reassemble the copier, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified. If it becomes necessary to replace the thermal fuse or any other fuse mounted on a board, be sure to use

one of the rating marked on the blown fuse.Always note the rating marked on the fuse, as the rating and mounting site or number used are subjectto change without notice.

Do not pull out the Toner Hopper while the Toner Bottle is turning, as a damaged Toner Replenishing Motoror locking mechanism could result.If the copier is to be run with the Front Door swung down, make sure that the Toner Hopper is in the lockedposition.

CAUTION: DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACEONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER.DISCARD USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.


D-2

Fuse Board

PWB-L 250V 3A (4)

Power Supply Board

PWB-C 250V 3A (5)

Power Supply Unit

PU1 125V 8A

Noise Filter Board

PWB-D 250V 15A

Exposure Thermal Fuse

TF1 110°C 10A

Fuse Holder

F3 250V 15A

<List of Fuses Used>

1156D001CA


D-3

1139SBD0102A

1-2. INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs WITH MOS ICsThe following precautions must be observed when handling P.W. Boards with MOS (Metal OxideSemiconductor) ICs.

During Transportation/Storage: During transportation or when in storage, new P.W. Boards must not be indiscriminately removed from

their protective conductive bags. Do not store or place P.W. Boards in a location exposed to direct sunlight. When it becomes absolutely necessary to remove a Board from its conductive bag or case, always place

it on its conductive mat in an area as free as possible from static electricity. Do not touch the pins of the ICs with your bare hands.

During Replacement: Before unplugging connectors from the P.W. Boards, make sure that the power cord has been unplugged

from the outlet. When removing a Board from its conductive bag or conductive case, do not touch the pins of the ICs or

the printed pattern. Place it in position by holding only the edges of the Board. Before plugging connectors into the Board, make sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the

power outlet.

During Inspection:

Avoid checking the IC directly with a multimeter; use connectors on the Board. Never create a closed circuit across IC pins with a metal tool. When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the Board, be sure

to ground your body.

1151SBD0103A

1-3. HANDLING OF THE PC DRUMDuring Transportation/Storage: Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the PC Drum. The storage temperature is in the range between –20°C and +40°C. In summer, avoid leaving the PC Drum in a car for a long time.

Handling: Ensure that the correct PC Drum is used. Whenever the PC Drum has been removed from the copier, store it in its container or protect it with a Drum

Cloth. The PC Drum exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to strong light over an extended period

of time. Never, therefore, expose it to direct sunlight. Use care not to contaminate the surface of the PC Drum with oil-base solvent, fingerprints, and other for-

eign matter. Do not scratch the surface of the PC Drum. Do not apply chemicals to the surface of the PC Drum. Do not attempt to wipe clean the surface of the PC Drum.


D-4

If, however, the surface is contaminated with fingerprints, clean it using the following procedure.

NOTES

The Organic Photoconductor Drum is softer than CdS and Selenium Drums and is thereforesusceptible to scratches.

Even when the PC Drum is only locally dirtied, wipe the entire surface. Do not expose the PC Drum to direct sunlight. Clean it as quickly as possible even under interior

illumination. If dirt remains after cleaning, repeat the entire procedure from the beginning one more time.

1. Place the PC Drum into one half of its container.

2. Gently wipe the residual toner off the surface of the PCDrum with a dry, Dust-Free Cotton Pad.a) Rotate the PC Drum so that the area of its surface on

which the line of toner left by the Cleaning Blade is pres-ent is facing straight up. Wipe the surface in one contin-uous movement from the rear edge of the PC Drum tothe front edge and off the surface of the PC Drum.

b) Rotate the PC Drum slightly and wipe the newly ex-posed surface area with a CLEAN face of the Dust-FreeCotton Pad. Repeat this procedure until the entire sur-face of the PC Drum has been thoroughly cleaned.

* At this time, always use a CLEAN face of the dry Dust-FreeCotton Pad until no toner is evident on the face of the Padafter wiping.

3. Soak a small amount of either ethyl alcohol or isopropyl al-cohol into a clean, unused Dust-Free Cotton Pad whichhas been folded over into quarters. Now, wipe the surfaceof the PC Drum in one continuous movement from its rearedge to its front edge and off its surface one to two times.

* Never move the Pad back and forth.

4. Using the SAME face of the Pad, repeat the procedure ex-plained in the latter half of step 3 until the entire surface ofthe PC Drum has been wiped. Always OVERLAP theareas when wiping. Two complete turns of the PC Drumwould be appropriate for cleaning.


D-5

1151SBD0104A

1-4. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED

(1) ScrewsPurpose of Application of Red Paint

Red paint is applied to the screws which cannot be readjusted, set, or reinstalled in the field.The basic rule is not to remove or loosen the screws to which red paint is applied. In addition, be advisedthat, if two or more screws are designated as those which must not be touched on a single part, onlyone representative screw may be marked with red paint.

(2) Variable Resistors on Board

Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in “ADJUST-MENT.”

(3) Other Screws

Two screws on the LowerPre-Image Transfer Guide Plate

1136D069AA1136D068AA

Two screws on the Mirror Motor Unit

1136D070AA

Two screws on the Lens Rail


D-6

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY2

2-1. DOORS, COVERS, AND EXTERIOR PARTS: IDENTIFICATION AND

REMOVAL PROCEDURES

12

13

14

15

16

11

5

43

2

1

1156D002AA

1156D003AA

7

8

10

6

9


D-7

No. Part Name Removal Procedure

1 Front Door Swing down No. 1. Remove two Front Door hinge shafts.Remove one belt mounting screw inside the Front Door.

2 Control Panel Raise No. 12. Swing down No. 1. Open No. 8. Re-move No. 7. Swing down No. 14. Remove No. 13. Remove two control panel mounting screws. Remove twomagnet attraction plate screws. Unplug one connectorfrom MSC Board. Remove one connector.

3 Original Width Scale Raise No. 12. Remove two scale mounting screws.

4 Original GlassNote:When the Original Width Scale has been removed, usecare not to lose two springs.

5 Rear Upper Cover (Small) Raise No. 12. Open No. 14. Remove No. 13. Re-move the screw cover. Remove one Rear Upper Cover(Small) mounting screw.

6 Rear Upper Cover Raise No. 12. Open No. 14. Remove No. 13. Re-move No. 5. Open No. 8 Remove No. 7. Removeone Rear Upper Cover mounting screw.

7 Right Cover Open No. 8. Open the Multi Bypass Table. Removefour Right Cover mounting screws.

8 Right Door(Manual Bypass Unit)

Open No. 8. Remove two cover mounting screws. Remove the harness from one wiring saddle. Unplugthree connectors. Remove two Right Door mountingscrews.

9 Counter Cover Snap off the Counter Cover. (It is secured by catches at twoplaces.)

10 2nd Drawer <Except 120V Areas>See p. D-17

11 1st Drawer <120V Areas>See p. D-18

12 Original Cover Remove No. 12 by pulling up.

13 Upper Left Cover Swing down No. 14. Remove six Upper Left Covermounting screws.

14 Left Door (Exit/DuplexSwitching Unit)

See p. D-61

15 Middle Left Cover Remove No. 13. Remove two Middle Left Cover mountingscrews.

16 Rear Cover Remove six Rear Cover mounting screws.


D-8

2-2. REMOVAL OF CIRCUIT BOARDS When removing a circuit board, refer to “PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs” contained in

SWITCHES ON PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures given on the next page. Replacement of a circuit board may call for readjustment or resetting of particular items. The removal procedures given on the next page omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the

circuit board support or circuit board. Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure

to ground your body.

1156D004AA

PWB-H PWB-J UN2 PWB-A

PWB-R

PWB-F

HV1

PU1

PWB-L

PWB-C

UN3

PWB-G

PWB-D

PWB-I

PWB-B

UN1


D-9

Symbol Part Name Removal Procedure

PWB-A Master Board Remove No. 16.

PWB-B MSC Board Swing down No. 1. Remove the Circuit Board cover.

PWB-C Power Supply Board Remove No. 16. Remove the Toner Pipe.<EP4000 Except U.S.A., Canada and Europe>Remove No. 16. Remove the Toner Collecting Box.Remove the Toner Pipe.

PWB-D Noise Filter Board Remove No. 16.

PWB-E1 1st Drawer Paper EmptyBoard Slide out the drawer. Remove the Holder. Remove the

PWB-E2 2nd Drawer PaperEmpty Board

Paper Mounting Plate.

PWB-F SCP Board Remove No. 16.

PWB-G AIDC Sensor Board Swing down No. 1. Remove the IU. Remove the PCDrum Charge Corona. Remove the PC Drum Paper Sepa-rator.

PWB-H AE Sensor Board Remove No. 3. Remove No. 4.

PWB-I Tech. Rep. SettingsSwitches Board

Swing down No. 1. Remove the Circuit Board Cover.

PWB-J Exposure Lamp Regulator

Remove No. 16. Remove PWB-A Mounting Bracket Assy. Remove the ADF Connector Unit. Remove the Expo-sure Lamp Regulator Cover.

PWB-L Fuse Board Remove No. 16.<EP4000 Except U.S.A., Canada and Europe>Remove No. 16. Remove the Toner Collecting Box.Remove the Toner Pipe.

PWB-M1 1st Drawer Flexibleprinted Circuit

PWB-M2 2nd Drawer Flexibleprinted Circuit

Slide out the drawer.

PWB-R RAM Board Remove No. 16.

UN1 Control Panel Swing down No. 1 Remove No. 2.

UN2 Original Size DetectingBoard

Remove No. 16.

UN3 ATDC Sensor Swing down No. 1. Remove the IU.

UN5 1st Drawer Paper Descent Key Slide out the drawer. Remove the Cassette Cover. Re-

UN6 2nd Drawer Paper Descent Key

move the Switch Cover.

PU1 Power Supply Unit Remove No. 16. Remove the Power Supply Unit Cover.

HV1 Hight Voltage Unit Remive No. 16. Remove the HV1 Cover.

Readjustment/Resetting Involved in Replacement of PWB-G, PWB-R, UN2 and UN3 When PWB-G is replaced:

Adjust the exposure level in the Auto Exposure mode. (See p. D-72.) When PWB-R (RAM Board) is replaced:

Carry out Memory Clear and then make the Tech. Rep. Choice, User’s Choice, and Adjust settingsagain.

When UN2 is replaced: Make the initial adjustment of the Original Size Detecting Board. (See p. D-68.)

When UN3 is replaced: Discard the developer which had been used until UN3 was replaced, recharge the Developing Unitwith fresh starter, and adjust the ATDC. (See p. D-69.)


D-10

2-3. PAPER TAKE-UP/TRANSPORT SECTIONS

(1) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Unit<Except 120V Areas>

1. Remove the Right Door, Right Cover, and Rear Cover.2. Remove the 1st and 2nd Drawers. (For the removal of the 1st and 2nd Drawers, see p. D-17.)3. Remove two locking wiring saddles.4. Unplug one connector from Power Supply Board PWB-C.5. Disconnect the hookup connector.

1156D005AA

<120V Areas>

1. Remove the Right Door, Right Cover, and Rear Cover.2. Remove the 1st and 2nd Drawers. (For the removal of the 1st and 2nd Drawers, see p. D-18.)3. Remove one locking wiring saddle.4. Disconnect the hookup connector.

1156D006CA


D-11

1156D007AA

1134D006AA

1134D007AA

<Except 120V Areas>

1134D008AA

<120V Areas>

1156D008CA

6. Remove three screws to free the Paper Take-Up Connec-tor Assy.

7. Remove two screws each to free 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M11 and 2nd Drawer paper Take-Up Motor M12.

* For ease of understanding, the illustration shows wherethe connectors and Paper Take-Up Motors are removed.

8. Remove two screws and the Paper Guide Plate.

9. Remove two edge covers with locks.10. Unplug three hookup connectors.

9. Remove two edge covers with locks.10. Unplug one hookup connector.


D-12

1134D009AA

12. Remove five screws and the Paper Take-Up Unit.

1156D009AA

11. Pull the harness out to the front from the rear frame.


D-13

(2) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy and Separator Roll

Assy1. Remove the Right Door.2. Remove two screws and the Paper Guide Plate from each drawer.

1134D011AA

3. Unhook the front and rear springs from the copier frame. Remove the Paper Separator Roll/PaperGuide Plate Assy by turning it about 90 in the direction of the arrow.

1156D010AA


D-14

1156D011AA

5. Disassemble the Paper Separator Roll Assy.

1156D012AA

4. Remove one screw and the Paper Separator Roll AssyMounting Bracket from each drawer. (The illustrationshows how the Paper Separator Roll Assy is removedfrom the 2nd Drawer.)


D-15

1156D013AA

1156D014AA

1156D015AA

1156D016AA

6. Remove two C-clips from each Paper Take-Up Roll/FeedRoll Assy. (The illustration is for the Paper Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy for the 2nd Drawer.)

7. Remove the bushing from the front end of each PaperTake-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy.

8. Remove the rear bushing from the holder.

9. Move the coupling holder of each Paper Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy in the direction of the arrow to work it off thepin of the copier. This allows the Paper Take-Up Roll /FeedRoll Assy to come out of the copier.

NOTE

When reinstalling the Paper Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy,place it above the Pressure Release Lever.


D-16

10. Disassemble the Paper Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy.

1156D017AA

*Keep the lock pin for later use.

(3) Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Roll, Feed Roll, and Separator Roll1. Remove each Paper Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy.2. Remove each Paper Separator Roll Assy.3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe each roll clean of dirt.

1156D019AA1156D018AA

Cleaning the Paper Take-up Roll/Feed Roll Cleaning the Paper Separator Roll


D-17

(4) Cleaning of the Vertical Transport Rollers

1134D016AA

(5) Removal of the Drawers*Though the following steps and illustrations are for the 1st Drawer, the same procedure applies also to

the 2nd Drawer.

<Except 120V Areas>

1156D020AA

1134D133AA

1134D143AA

1. Remove the Right Door, Right Cover, and Rear Cover.2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe each roller

clean of dirt.

1. Slide out the drawer and remove one screw and the rightstopper.

2. Remove one screw and the left stopper.

3. Remove the drawer from the copier.


D-18

<120V Areas>

1156D023AA

1134D139CA

1134D140CA

1134D141CA

1. Turn ON Power Switch S1.2. Press the Paper Descent Key and then slide out the draw-

er.

3. As with the metric areas, remove the right and left stop-pers.

4. Remove one screw and the hookup connector cover.

5. Remove one screw and the hookup connector mountingbracket.

6. Unplug the hookup connector. Remove the drawer.


D-19

(6) Removal of the Upper Synchronizing Roller

1156D024AA

1156D025AA

1156D026AA

1156D027AA

Rear

1134D025AA

Front

1. Swing down the Front Door.2. Swing the Transport Section Release Lever down.3. Remove the Rear Cover.4. Unplug the bias terminal from High Voltage Unit HV1.5. Unplug CN1 of HV1.

6. Remove two screws to free HV1.

7. Snap off one E-ring to free Synchronizing Roller ClutchCL2.

8. Snap off the E-ring and remove the bushing from the rearend of the Upper Synchronizing Roller.

9. Swing down the Front Door and slide out the IU.10. Snap off the E-ring and remove the bushing from the front

end of the Upper Synchronizing Roller.


D-20

1156D028AA

(7) Cleaning of the Upper and Lower Synchronizing Rollers

1136D092AA

1134D027AA

(8) Replacement of the Paper Dust Remover

1136D093AA

Rear

1136D094AA

11. Remove the Upper Synchronizing Roller.

1. Swing down the Front Door and slide out the IU.2. Using a brush or a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean

the Upper Synchronizing Roller.

3. Swing down the Transport Section Release Lever.4. Using a brush or a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean

the Lower Synchronizing Roller.

1. Swing down the Front Door and slide out the IU.2. Loosen the screw that secures the Paper Dust Remover

Assy at the rear of the copier.3. Remove the screw that secures the Paper Dust Remover

Assy at the front of the copier.4. Remove and replace the Paper Dust Remover Assy.

5. When only the Paper Dust Remover is to be replaced, affixthe new one along the reference line as shown on the left.


D-21

(9) Cleaning of the Paper Dust Remover

1136D095AA

1. Remove the Paper Dust Remover Assy.2. Using a brush, whisk dust off the Paper Dust Remover.


D-22

(10) Removal of the Suction Unit1. Remove the 1st and 2nd Drawers.2. Swing down the Front Door and slide out the IU.3. Remove the Paper Dust Remover Assy.4. Remove the Fusing Unit.

1156D029AA

1156D030AA

1156D031AA

5. Remove the motor cover.

6. Unplug two connectors from the lower end of the SuctionUnit.

7. Swing the Transport Section Release Lever back to itsoriginal position.

8. Pressing down the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coro-nas Unit, pull it out of the copier.


D-23

1156D032AA

1136D101AA

1134D028AA

(11) Disassembly of the Suction Unit

1136D102AA

1136D103AA

9. Swing down the Transport Section Release Lever.10. Holding up the Suction Unit, remove the compression coil.

11. Remove the Suction Unit by sliding it to the right.

NOTEWhen removing and reinstalling the Suction Unit, use carenot to bend the ground plate located on the right in the rear.

NOTEWhen reinstalling the Suction Unit, make sure that twopositioning pins on the copier fit into the positioning holesin the Suction Unit.

1. Remove the Suction Unit.2. Remove two screws and the duct.3. Remove four screws and the Suction Drive Unit.

NOTE

When reinstalling the Suction Drive Unit, try to press itdown against the Suction Base Plate.

4. Remove three driven rolls.


D-24

1136D104AA

1136D105AA

(12) Disassembly of the Multi Bypass Unit

1156D033AA

1156D034AA

1156D035AA

5. Remove three Suction Belts.

6. Remove the Suction Roller as shown on the left.

1. Open the Right Door.2. Remove two screws and the cover.3. Remove the harness from one locking wiring saddle.4. Unplug three connectors.

5. Remove two screws and the Right Door.

NOTE

The Right Door must be adjusted for correct position whenit is reinstalled. (See p. D-101.)

6. Remove four screws and the Separator Guide Plate Assy.


D-25

1136D107AA

Close-Coiled End

1136D108AA

1136D109AA

1136D110AA

1156D036AA

7. Remove the compression coil.

NOTE

When reinstalling the compression coil, place it so that itsclose-coiled end faces the Separator Unit.

8. Remove one C-clip and the Separator Assy.

9. Remove one C-clip and the Separator Roll Assy.

10. Remove the harness from the edge cover and cord clamp.

11. Remove four screws and the Solenoid Mounting Bracket.

NOTE

When the solenoid has been replaced or the solenoidmounting screws removed, be sure to adjust the positionof the solenoid. (For the adjustment procedure, see p.D-98.)


D-26

1156D037AA

1136D114AA

1136D115AA

0 to –1mm A

1156D038AA

1139D112AA

12. Remove two set screws and the electromagnetic springclutch.

NOTES

When reinstalling the electromagnetic spring clutch, ori-ent the Paper Take-Up Roll shaft and the clutch asshown on the left.

The end of the clutch must be flush with or slightly re-cessed (up to 1 mm) from the end face of the Paper Take-Up Roll shaft. (The roll shaft should never protrude.)

There must be a gap of 1 mm or more at A when the Pa-per Take-Up Roll shaft is pushed in the direction of thearrow.

13. Snap off two C-clips and remove the Paper Take-Up RollAssy.

14. Snap off three C-clips and remove the Feed Roll.


D-27

1139D113AA

Cleaning of the Manual Bypass Paper Take-Up Roll

1136D117AA

Cleaning of the Manual Bypass Feed Roll

1136D118AA

Cleaning of the Manual Bypass Separator Roll

1156D039AA

15. Snap off the C-clip and remove the Paper Take-Up Roll.

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean the Paper-Take-Up Roll.

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean the FeedRoll.

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean the Separa-tor Roll.


D-28

2-4. OPTICAL SECTION

(1) Cleaning of the Original Glass

1136D120AA

(2) Cleaning of the Scanner Shaft

1136D121AA

1156D040AA

(3) Cleaning of the Scanner Rail

1156D041AA

Wipe clean the Original Glass with a soft cloth.

NOTE

The surface of the Original Glass is coated with conductivematerial. Do not use a wax-based detergent.An alcohol-dampened cloth may be used if the glass is se-riously contaminated.

1. Remove the Original Width Scale.2. Remove the Original Glass.

3. Wipe clean the Scanner Shaft (in the rear of the copier)with a soft cloth.

NOTEApply a lubricating oil after cleaning the Scanner Shaft.

Wipe clean the Scanner Rail (at the front of the copier) witha soft cloth.

NOTEApply a lubricating oil after cleaning the Scanner Rail.


D-29

(4) Removal of the Scanner

1156D042AA

1156D043AA

1156D044AA

(5) Cleaning of the Exposure Lamp

1156D045AA

1076D131

1. Move the Scanner to the right side of the copier.Remove three screws to free the Scanner.

NOTE

Hold the Scanner at a point near the Scanner Shaft whenmoving it.To remove the Scanner, turn it counterclockwise.

2. Unplug the Thermal Fuse terminal connector and removethe Thermal Fuse wire from three clamps.

3. Unplug the Exposure Lamp terminal connector.

4. Turn over the Scanner and remove one screw, one wash-er, and the ground wire.

5. Remove the tie band and harness.6. Remove the Scanner from the copier.

1. Remove one screw and the Exposure Lamp terminal.2. Slide out the Exposure Lamp.

NOTE

When the Exposure Lamp has been cleaned or replaced,be sure to make the “adjustment of exposure level in theAuto Exposure mode.” (See p. D-72.)

3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean the lampby gently wiping its surface in one direction.

NOTE

When reinstalling the lamp, point the protruding navel ofthe lamp toward the opening in the Lamp Reflector so thatthe protruding navel will not hit against the Lamp Reflector.


D-30

(6) Removal of the Thermal Fuse

1156D046AA

(7) Cleaning of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd Mirrors

1156D047AA

1136D130AA

1136D131AA

1. Unplug the Thermal Fuse connector.2. Remove the Thermal Fuse cord from three clamps.3. Remove one screw and Thermal Fuse cover.4. Remove two screws and the Thermal Fuse.

1. Wipe clean the 1st Mirror with a soft cloth.

2. Wipe clean the 2nd Mirror with a soft cloth.

3. Wipe clean the 3rd Mirror with a soft cloth.


D-31

(8) Cleaning of the Lens and 4th and 5th Mirrors

1136D133AA

1136D132AA

1136D134AA

1. Remove the Original Glass.2. Remove two screws and the Optical Cover.3. Remove two screws and the Lens Cover.

4. Gently dust off the surface of the Lens using a soft cloth.

5. Wipe clean the 4th and 5th Mirrors with a soft cloth.


D-32

(9) Winding of the Lens Drive Cable

1136D135AA

Cable Drive Gear

A

B

1136D136AA

1136D137AA

1136D138AA

1. Hold the Cable Drive Gear with the bead at the bottom.

2. Wind the longer length of the cable three and 1/2 turnsclockwise around the Cable Drive Gear, working from theback to the front side. Then tape it.

3. Wind the shorter length of the cable three and 1/2 turnscounterclockwise around the Cable Drive Gear, workingfrom the front to back side. Then tape it.


D-33

1136D139AA

1136D140AA

A

1136D141AA

2mm or Less

1136D142AAB

4. Pass the longer length of the cable through the hole in thelight blocking plate.

5. Slide the Cable Drive Gear onto its shaft and insert awrench into the hole (4-mm dia.) to position the gear.

6. Wind the shorter length of the cable around pulley A.

7. Secure the shorter length of the cable to the Cable FixingBracket.

NOTE

Ensure a distance of 2 mm or less for the dimension shownon the left.

8. Wind the longer length of the cable around pulley B.9. Hook the spring onto the longer length of the cable and pull

the spring to hook it onto the shorter length of the cable.10. Remove the wrench and peel off the two pieces of tape

used in steps 2 and 3.


D-34

(10) Removal of Scanner Motor M2

1156D048AA

1156D049AA

1. Remove the Right Cover, Rear Cover, and Rear UpperCover.

2. Remove four screws to free PWB-F.

3. Unplug one connector. Then, remove the edge cover witha lock and the harness.

4. Remove four screws and Scanner Motor M2.


D-35

(11) Removal of the Scanner Drive Cable1. Remove the Original Cover.2. Remove the Right Cover, Rear Cover, Rear Upper Cover, and Upper Left Cover.3. Remove the Original Glass.4. Remove the Scanner.5. Remove Scanner Motor M2.

1156D048AA

1156D050AA

1134D037AA

1134D038AA

6. Remove two screws to free the SCP Board (PWB-F)mounting bracket.*The illustration shows where the SCP Board has been re-moved for ease of understanding.

7. Remove two screws and Original Glass Cooling Fan MotorM5.

8. Using a flat blade screwdriver, loosen the right spring an-chor to unhook the bead from the anchor, thereby remov-ing the cable.

9. Move the Scanner to the center and remove the ScannerFixing Bracket.


D-36

(12) Winding of the Scanner Drive Cable Important

When the Scanner Drive Cable has been wound:

1) Perform the “Focus-positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage.”

2) Slide the Scanner by hand to check for cable tension before turning the copier ON.

3) No part of the cable should ride on others when winding the cable around the Cable Drive Pulley. Further,

no part in the cable should be bent or no part of the cable jacket frayed.

* Wind the cable five turns around the Cable Drive Pulley.

1156D054AA

Wind Cable5 Turns.


D-37

1156D051AA

(13) Cleaning of the 6th Mirror Protective Filter

1156D174AA

1156D175AA

(14) Cleaning of the Cooling Fan Filter

1156D052AA

10. Remove the Scanner Drive Cable from the pulleys.11. Remove one screw to free the Original Cover Detecting

Sensor Assy.12. Remove four screws and the Scanner Drive Pulley mount-

ing bracket.13. Snap off one E-ring and remove the Scanner Drive Pulley.

1. Swing down the Front Door and slide out IU.2. Remove the Plate Spring.3. Remove the 6th Mirror Protective Filter.

4. Using a soft cloth, wipe clean the 6th Mirror Protective Fil-ter.

1. Remove six screws and the Rear Cover.2. Clean the Cooling Fan Filter using a brush or a vacuum

cleaner.


D-38

2-5. Imaging Unit

(1) Removal of the Imaging Unit

1136D150AA

1156D055AA

(2) Disassembly of the Imaging Unit

1136D152AA

1156D056AA

1156D057AA

1. Swing down the Front Door.2. Swing the Transport Section Release Lever down.

3. Loosen two screws that secure the IU.4. Slide out the IU.

1. Remove the PC Drum Charge Corona by moving it to therear.

2. Loosen one screw and remove the stopper.3. Remove the PC Drum.

4. Pull the Main Hopper to the front and unplug two HopperUnit connectors.


D-39

1136D155AA

1156D058AA

1156D059AA

1156D060AA

Rear

Front

1136D157AA

5. Remove three screws and the Main Hopper.

6. Unplug one connector and remove three screws and theSub Hopper.

7. Remove two screws and the Developer Scattering Pre-vention Plate.

NOTE

Do not remove the Doctor Blade Assy, as a changed Dbcould result.

NOTE

Install the Developer Scattering Prevention Plate so thatits seal is placed behind the side seals of the DeveloperMixing Chamber.

8. Dump the developer out of the Developing Unit.


D-40

1136D172AA

1136D173AA

1156D061AA

1134D047AA

Coupling Holder

Collar

9. Remove two screws and the Cleaning Blade.

NOTE

When reinstalling the Cleaning Blade, press the bladetightly up against the mounting bracket.

10. Unplug one connector.11. Remove three screws and the PC Drum Paper Separator

Finger Holder Assy.

NOTE

When reinstalling the PC Drum Paper Separator FingerHolder Assy, fit the collar of the assy onto the couplingholder in the rear.


D-41

12. Remove the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers and AIDC Sensor Board PWB-G as shown below.

1156D062AA

Torsion Spring

PWB-G

Assy

* PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers At removal and reinstallation, use care not to damage the tip of the fingers.Also, use care not to get hurt by the tip of the fingers.

* Hook the torsion spring properly.After installation, check that thePaper Separator Fingers oper-ate smoothly.

Top View Bottom View1156D063AA

PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Installed


D-42

(3) Replacement of the PC Drum

1136U014AA

(4) Cleaning of the Developer Scattering Prevention Plate

1136D050AA

(5) Cleaning of the Ds Positioning Collars

1136D177AA

(6) Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Trap

1136D178AA

(7) Cleaning of the Cleaning Blade

1156D167AA

1. Slide out the IU.2. Loosen one screw and remove the stopper.3. Remove and replace the PC Drum.

NOTEWhen the PC Drum has been replaced, reset the count of“PC Drum” of “Port/Option” counters of the Tech. Rep.mode and then make the “adjustment of exposure level inthe Auto Exposure mode.” (For the “adjustment of expo-sure level in the Auto Exposure mode,” see p. D-72.)

Using a brush, whisk dust off the Developer Scattering Pre-vention Plate.

Using a brush or a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean theDs Positioning Collars.

Using a brush or a vacuum cleaner, clean the Toner AntispillTrap.

Using a brush, whisk paper dust and toner off the CleaningBlade.


D-43

(8) Replacement of the Cleaning Blade

1136D172AA

1138D321AA

1136U013AA

1136D303AA

1. Remove and replace the Cleaning Blade.

2. Remove the Toner Bottle from the IU. Insert a brushthrough the toner port and into the toner.

3. Apply toner to the entire surface of the new CleaningBlade.

NOTE

Be sure to apply toner to both end faces of theCleaning Blade.

4. Using the brush, apply lubricant shipped with the CleaningBlade to the two side seals shown.


D-44

1136U014AA

1156D064AA

1156D065AA

1134U022AA

1156D066AA

5. Install the PC Drum.

NOTE

Do not touch the surface of the PC Drum with barehands. Hold onto both ends of the PC Drum wheninstalling the drum.

6. Fit the PC Drum stopper and tighten the screw.

7. Apply a thin coat of toner to the surface of the PC Drum.

8. Holding onto both ends of the PC Drum, turn the PC Drumone complete turn in the forward direction.

9. Holding onto both ends of the PC Drum, turn the PC Drum1/2 turns in the backward direction.

10. Holding onto both ends of the PC Drum, turn the PC Drum1/2 turns in the forward direction.


D-45

(9) Replacement of the Starter

1136D157AA

2. Turning the Bucket Roller, pour fresh starter evenly into the chamber.

NOTE

Shake the packet of starter well before opening it.

NOTE

When the starter has been replaced, reset the count of “Starter” of the “Port/Option” counters of theTech. Rep. mode and then make the ATDC adjustment. (For the ATDC adjustment, see p. D-69.)

1134D051AA

1. Dump the developer out of the Developing Unit.


D-46

(10) Cleaning of the AIDC Sensor Board

1156D067AA

(11) Cleaning of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers

1136D181AA

(12) Replacement and Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Seal and Cleaning ofthe Toner Antispill Plate

1136D182AA

1134D052AA

1136D184AA

1. Remove the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers Assy.2. Using a brush or a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean

the AIDC Sensor Board.

1. Remove the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers Assy.2. Using a brush or a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean

the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers.

1. Remove the IU.2. Remove two screws, the Toner Antispill Plate, and Toner

Antispill Seal.3. Replace the Toner Antispill Seal.

4. Using a brush, clean the Toner Antispill Seal.5. Using a brush, clean the Toner Antispill Plate.

NOTE

When reinstalling the Toner Antispill Plate and Toner Anti-spill Seal, press them in the direction of the arrows.


D-47

(13) Removal of Main Erase Lamp LA3

1156D068AA

(14) Cleaning of the Main Erase Lamp Filter

1136D186AA

1136D187AA

(15) Cleaning of Image Erase Lamp LA2

1136D188AA

(16) Replacement of Image Erase Lamp LA2

1134D055AA

1. Swing down the Front Door.2. Unplug one connector.3. Remove one screw and Main Erase Lamp LA3.

1. Swing down the Front Door.2. Remove the Main Erase Lamp Filter.

3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean theMain Erase Lamp Filter.

1. Swing down the Front Door.2. Remove the IU.3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean

Image Erase Lamp LA2.

1. Swing down the Front Door.2. Remove the IU.3. Remove one adjusting screw to free Image Erase Lamp

LA2.


D-48

1134D056AA

(17) Removal of the Ozone Filter (PC Drum Charge Corona)

1134D057AA

(18) Removal of the Ozone Filter (Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas)

1136D189AA

(19) Removal of the Toner Collecting Box (Except the U.S.A., Canada, and Europe)

1136D087AA

4. Unplug one connector in the rear and remove Image EraseLamp LA2.

NOTE

When Image Erase Lamp LA2 has been removed, makethe “adjustment of edge erase.” (For the adjustment ofedge erase, see p. D-93.)

1. Swing down the Front Door.2. Swing out the Main Hopper.3. Slide out the Ozone Filter.

1. Remove the Rear Cover.2. Remove one screw and the Filter Cover.3. Pull out the Ozone Filter.

1. Remove the Rear Cover.2. Remove the Toner Collecting Box.

*For removal of the large capacity Toner Collecting Box,please refer to the instructions on the large capacity Box.


D-49

2–6. PC DRUM CHARGE CORONA AND IMAGE TRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS

(1) Removal of the PC Drum Charge Corona

1156D069AA

(2) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Housing

1156D070AA

1156D071AA

1139D176AA

1139D177AA

Move the PC Drum Charge Corona to the rear and pull it off.

1. Remove the IU.2. Remove one screw and PC Drum charge Corona Unit.3. Press the Mesh Holder on the front of the Corona Unit in

the direction of arrow A to remove the Grid Mesh.

4. Remove the Cleaning Pad Cover.5. Remove the End Caps from the front and rear ends of the

Unit.

6. Remove the Comb Electrode.

NOTE

Use care not to deform the Electrode. When removing it,first snap off its spring end.

7. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Hous-ing clean of dirt.


D-50

(3) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Grid Mesh

1139D178AA

(4) Cleaning of the Comb Electrode

1156D072AA

(5) Removal of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas

1134D062AA

(6) Cleaning and Replacement of the Image Transfer Corona Wire

1136D198AA

1136D199AA

Blow all foreign matter off the Grid with a blower brush.

NOTE

If the blower brush is not effective in cleaning the Grid, usea soft cloth dampened with alcohol to clean serious con-tamination.

Clean Comb Electrode using the Corona Unit Cleaning Lever.

1. Swing down the Front Door.2. Pull out the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas.

1. Swing down the Front Door.2. Clean the Image Transfer Corona Wire using the Corona

Wire Cleaning Lever.

NOTE

If the Image Transfer Corona Wire is seriously contami-nated, dampen a soft cloth with alcohol, hold it with a pairof tweezers, and wipe the wire gently in one direction-fromthe hook end to the spring end.


D-51

1136D200AA

1136D201AA

(7) Cleaning and Replacement of the Paper Separator Corona Wire

1136D202AA

1136D203AA

(8) Cleaning of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Housing

1136D205AA

3. Remove the Holder Covers at the front and rear.

4. Remove the corona wire, first at the spring end.5. Replace the corona wire with a new one.

1. Remove four Paper Guides.

2. Dampen a soft cloth with alcohol, hold it with a pair of twee-zers, and wipe the Paper Separator Corona Wire gently inone direction – from the hook end to spring end.

3. Replace the Paper Separator Corona Wire by using thesame procedure as that for the Image Transfer CoronaWire.

1. Remove four Paper Guides.2. Remove the Holder Covers at the front and rear.3. Remove the Image Transfer and Paper Separator Corona

Wires – first at the spring end.4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the hous-

ing clean of dirt.


D-52

(9) Cleaning of the Lower Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate

1136D206AA

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the LowerPre-Image Transfer Guide Plate.


D-53

2–7. FUSING UNIT

(1) Removal of the Fusing Unit

1156D073AA

(2) Disassembly of the Fusing Unit

1156D074AA

1156D075AA

1156D076AA

1156D077AA

Cover Harness Cover

Fusing Unit

1. Open the Left Door.2. Swing down the Front Door.3. Remove one screw and the Fusing Unit.

1. Remove two screws and the Front Cover.

2. Unplug the connector of the Heater Lamp on the front.3. Remove three harness holders.4. Remove the Heater Lamp cord from the two edge covers.5. Remove two screws and the front lamp holder.

6. Remove two screws and the cover.

NOTE

At reinstallation, position the cover between the Fusing Unit and harness cover.


D-54

1156D078AA

1156D079AA

1156D080AA

1156D081AA

1136D213AA

7. Remove one screw and the Heater Lamp cord in the rear.8. Remove the Heater Lamp cord from the locking edge cov-

er.

9. Remove three screws and the rear lamp holder.10. Remove the Heater Lamp cord from the wiring saddle.11. Remove the Heater Lamp.

12. Remove four screws and the Upper Cover.

13. Remove two screws and the Upper Fusing Paper Separa-tor Finger mounting bracket.

NOTE

When reinstalling the Upper Fusing Paper Separator Finger mounting bracket, be sure that both ends of the bracket are in tight contact with the frame.


D-55

1156D082AA

1156D083AA

1156D084AA

1136D217AA

1156D085AA

14. Remove the harness from the Harness Guide.15. Unplug the connectors of the two Thermistors.

16. Remove one screw, shoulder screw, and the HarnessGuide.

17. Remove one screw and the Thermoswitch cord.

18. Remove two screws and the Temperature Detector Assy.

NOTE

When reinstalling the Temperature Detector Assy, besure that both ends of the assy are in tight contact withthe frame.

19. Remove the Gear.20. Remove two shoulder screws and the Fusing Unit En-

trance Guide Plate.


D-56

21. Remove the two torsion springs.22. Remove two shoulder screws and the Lower Exit Guide Assy.

LowerFusing Roller

Upper Fusing Roller

Torsion Spring

ShoulderScrew

Shoulder Screw

Torsion Spring

Lower Exit Guide Assy1156D086AA

Front

Rear

Lower Exit Guide Assy Position

Installing the Lower Exit Guide Assy

Lower Fusing Paper Separator FingerContact

Lower FusingRoller

No ClearanceAllowed.

1134D067AA


D-57

23. Loosen the screw that secures the spring bracket at the front and then unhook the spring at the top.Repeat the same step for the spring in the rear.

NOTEWhen reinstalling the springs, alternately tighten the bracket mounting screws until the brackets completely contact the ends of the Lower Exit Guide Assy.

1156D087AA

1156D088AA

1156D089AA

1156D090AA

24. Remove the Lower Fusing Roller.

25. Remove two extension springs.26. Remove two E-rings, the gear, bushing, and Cleaning Roll-

er.

27. Remove two E-rings, then two gears.28. Remove two screws, the Upper Fusing Roller drive gear,

and Upper Fusing Roller.


D-58

(3) Replacement and Cleaning of the Upper Fusing Paper Separator Fingers

1156D091AA

1136D227AA

(4) Cleaning of the Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers

1136D228AA

(5) Cleaning of the Fusing Unit Entrance Guide Plate

1156D092AA

(6) Cleaning of Fusing Front and Rear Thermistors TH1/2

1156D093AA

1. Remove the Upper Fusing Paper Separator Finger mount-ing bracket.

2. Remove five springs.3. Slide out the shaft to remove the Upper Fusing Paper Sep-

arator Fingers.4. Replace the fingers with new ones.

5. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,wipe clean the Upper Fusing Paper Separator Fingers.

1. Remove the Lower Exit Guide Assy.2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,

wipe clean the Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers.

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the Fus-ing Unit Entrance Guide Plate.

1. Remove the Temperature Detector Assy.2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the

two thermistors.


D-59

(7) Cleaning of Fusing Thermoswitch TS1

1156D094AA

(8) Replacement and Cleaning of the Cleaning Roller

1156D089AA

1136D232AA

(9) Replacement and Cleaning of the Upper Fusing Roller

1156D090AA

1136D233AA

1. Remove the Temperature Detector Assy.2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the

thermoswitch.

1. Remove two screws and the Upper Cover.2. Remove the Cleaning Roller.3. Replace the Cleaning Roller with a new one.

4. Using a brush, whisk dust off the Cleaning Roller.

1. Remove the Upper Fusing Roller.2. Replace the Upper Fusing Roller with a new one.

3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,wipe clean the Upper Fusing Roller.


D-60

(10) Replacement and Cleaning of the Lower Fusing Roller

1156D088AA

1136D234AA

1. Remove the Lower Fusing Roller.2. Replace the Lower Fusing Roller with a new one.

3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,wipe clean the Lower Fusing Roller.


D-61

1156SBD0208A

2-8. EXIT UNIT

(1) Removal of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit1. Remove the Rear Cover.2. Open the Left Door.3. Remove the Upper Left Cover.

1134D144AA

1156D095AA

1156D096AA

1156D097AA

4. Remove four screws to free the Sorter Connector Assy.

5. Unplug two connectors.6. Remove one screw and the ground wire.

7. Snap off the E-ring from the shaft onto which the Exit/Du-plex Switching Unit is mounted.

8. Work the harness indicated by the arrow off the wiringsaddle.

9. Remove one screw that holds the belt.10. Remove two screws and the mounting bracket.11. Remove the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit.


D-62

1156SBD0300A

ADJUSTMENT31156SBD0301A

3-1. JIGS AND TOOLS USED Important

When adjusting the positions of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage, use jigs number and .

When adjusting the gap between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller, use jigs number and .

When adjusting the position of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers, use jigs number and .

Front Door Interlock SwitchActuating Jig

Predrive Inhibit SwitchActuating Jig

Scanner Positioning JigScanner/Mirrors

Carriage Positioning Jig

Sleeve/Magnet RollerPositioning Jig

D.B. Adjusting Jigs

PC Drum PaperSeparator FingerPositioning Jig

1136D006AA

1136D003AA

1136D002AA

1136D005AA1136D001AA

1136D004AA


D-63

1156SBD0302A

3-2. ADJUSTMENT REQUIREMENTS LIST

Adjustment Item Requirements Adjusting Point Ref.Page

Optimum exposure in theManual Exposure mode

Kodak Gray Scale: no imageof the 1st step, faint image ofthe 2nd step

Control panel D-73

Crosswise zoom ratio, fullsize (1.000) 200 ± 1.0 mm Control panel D-75

Feeding direction zoom ratio, full size (1.000) 300 ± 1.5 mm Control panel D-77

Multi Bypass Tablereference Position

(1.000) 20 ± 2.0 mm Multi Bypass Table D-79

1st Drawer referencePosition

(1.000) 20 ± 2.0 mm Drawer Positioning Plate D-80

2nd Drawer referencePosition

(1.000) 20 ± 2.0 mm Drawer Positioning Plate D-80

Leading edge registration,full size (1.000) 20 ± 1.5 mm Control panel D-81

Leading edge registration,enlargement (2.000) 40 ± 3.0 mm Control panel D-83

Leading edge registration,reduction (0.500) 10 ± 1.5 mm Control panel D-85

Leading edge registration,book second page (1.000) 20 ± 3.0 mm Control panel D-87

Image leading edge erasewidth (1.000) 16.5 mm Control panel D-89

Image trailing edge erasewidth (1.000) 0.55.5 mm Control panel D-91

Edge erase (1.000) 0.54.0 mm Edge Erase Adjusting Screw D-93


D-64

1151SBD0303A

3-3. ADJUSTMENT OF SWITCHES

MicroswitchesThe following microswitches are used in various parts of this copier.

Wiring for the NO Type Wiring for the NC Type

NC (Normally-Closed) : Current flows between NC and COM when the actuator is open.

NO (Normally-Open) : Current flows between NO and COM when the actuator is closed.

COM (Common) : Common contact for NC and NO.

Yellow (NO)

Red (COM)

Blue (NC)

Red (COM)1136D007AA 1136D008AA

Requirement

0.1 mm to0.5 mm

Actuator

Out-of-Adjustment (When the actuator is closed)

If the gap between the switch and actuator is too big, current does not at times flow to NC or NO. If there is no gap between the switch and actuator, the actuator is bent or the switch can be broken.

The gap between the switch and actuator should be 0.1 to 0.5mm when the actuator is closed.


D-65

Adjustment of Front Door Interlock Switch S21

1136D009AA

1136D010AA

1156D098AA

1. Swing down the Front Door.2. Remove six screws and the Upper Left Cover.

3. Remove three screws and the cover.4. Loosen two screws that secure Front Door Interlock

Switch.

5. Close the Front Door.6. Slowly move the switch to the front until the actuator is

closed by the actuator stop on the Front Door. Then, tight-en the two mounting screws.

The switch is wired for the NO type.


D-66

3-4. ADJUSTMENT OF BELT TENSION Important

Make sure that all gears are in positive mesh with each other and the belts snugly fit in the

pulley grooves.

Each belt should flex a little when finger-pressed down on the location indicated by the arrow.

Belt Tension Deflection (Reference only)

(1) Paper Take-Up Unit Timing Belt 300 ± 100 g Approx. 3 mm

(2) Developing Unit Timing Belt 350 ± 100 g Approx. 4 mm

(3) Fusing Unit Timing Belt 350 ± 100 g Approx. 3 mm

(4) IU Timing Belt 350 ± 100 g Approx. 5 mm

Loosen two screws that secure the Tension Lever. Move the Tension Lever in the direction of the arrow twoto three times. When the belt tension is correct, tighten the two screws.

1156D172AA

350 ± 100 g

300 ± 100 g

350 ± 100 g

350 ± 100 g

Move lever 2 to 3times, thentighten screws.




D-67

3-5. ACCESSING THE TECH. REP. MODE AND ADJUST MODE Accessing the Tech. Rep. Mode

To access the Tech. Rep. mode, press the following keys in order.

Stop Key Stop Key“0” “1”

1156D134CA

Press the keys in order of [1], [2], [3], and [4].

1134D069AA

Accessing the Adjust Mode

To access the Adjust mode, press the following keys in order with the Tech. Rep. mode menu on the

screen.

Stop Key Start Key

1156D138CAPress the keys in order of [1] and [2].

1134D071AA


D-68

1156SBD0306A

3-6. ELECTRICAL/IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

(1) Initial Adjustment of Original Size Detecting Board Important

The following adjustment must be made when memory has been cleared, RAM Board PWB-R

or Original Size Detecting Board UN2 replaced, or an Original Size Detecting Sensor replaced

or added.

1136D017AA

2. Call the Tech. Rep. mode menu to the screen.

3. Touch Function to show the Function menu on the screen.

4. Touch F7 Orig. Sensor .

5. Press the Start Key to let the copier make the initial adjustment of the Original Size Detecting Board.

1156D142CA 1156D135CA

NOTE

While the copier is in the adjustment cycle, the Start Key is lit up orange. The key turns green as soon as the adjustment cycle is completed.

6. After the adjustment has been made, press the Panel Reset Key to return the copier to the Basicscreen.

1. Lower the Original Cover with no original placed on theOriginal Glass.


D-69

(2) ATDC Adjustment Important

Make this adjustment only after the starter has been replaced.

1134D051AA



5. Touch F8 ATDC Adjust .

6. Press the Start Key to let the copier make the ATDC adjustment. (It will run for about 3 minutes.)

1156D142CA 1156D139CA

NOTES

While the copier is in the adjustment cycle, the Start Key is lit up orange. The key turns greenas soon as the adjustment cycle is completed.

Pressing the Start Key will automatically start the ATDC adjustment cycle. Be sure to run this cycle only after the starter has been replaced.

1. Load the IU with fresh starter.2. Reinstall the IU in the copier.


D-70

7. Touch Menu on the screen to show the Tech. Rep. mode menu again.

8. Touch Level History and enter the value for the “ATDC Ref. Level” on the Adjust Label affixed

inside the Front Door.9. Then, press the Panel Reset Key to return the copier to the Basic screen.

1156D143CA 1156D168CA

Enter This Value on the Adjust Label.

Should the F8 operation be run when the starter has not been replaced, check that the “ATDC Ref. Level”

value on the “Level History” screen matches that written on the Adjust Label. If they do not agree with

each other, change the “ATDC Ref. Level” value on the screen so that it matches the value on the Adjust

Label.

1156D143CA

Touch the shift key or to changethe value and touch Enter to validate thenew setting.

1156D169CA


D-71

(3) Adjustment of the Aperture Blades Requirement

There should be no dark or light bands running in the feeding direction on copies produced. (Adjust to

obtain the mean image density for all areas.)

Important

If dark and light bands running in the feeding direction occur on copies, make this adjustment after

checking the following.

1) The Drum Charge Corona Wire, Grid Mesh, and Image Transfer Corona Wire are free of dirt.

2) The surfaces of the Mirrors and Lens are free of dirt.

3) The surfaces of the Exposure Lamp and Main Erase Lamp are free of scratches and dirt.

4) The Cleaning Blade is free of waviness.

1. Make a copy under the following control panel settings.Original : A3 or A4 crosswise,

11” 17” or 11” 8-1/2” crosswisePaper : A3 or A4 crosswise,

11” 17” or 11” 8-1/2” crosswiseMagnification : 100 %ratioExposure : Manual (setting convenient for check)

2. Remove the Original Glass.3. Turn the copy on the Copy Tray around as shown to re-

verse the leading and trailing edges and align it with theAperture Blades.

4. Adjust to obtain the mean image density for all areas of thecopy.

NOTE

To make the image darker, move the Aperture Bladetoward the Auxiliary Reflector.To make the image lighter, move the Aperture Bladeaway from the Auxiliary Reflector.


D-72

(4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto Exposure Mode Important

Before starting the procedure, check that the Auto Exposure mode is selected on the Touch Panel.

For the adjustment, stack about five blank sheets of A3 or 11” 17” paper on the Original Glass

and lower the Original Cover.

After this adjustment, be sure to check the optimum exposure setting in the Manual Exposure mode.

1. Make sure that the Auto Exposure mode is selected on the Touch Panel. Then, stack about five blanksheets of A3, or 11” 17”, paper on the Original Glass and lower the Original Cover.

1134D079AA

1156D140CA



4. Touch F5 Optimum & AE .

5. Press the Start Key to let the copier adjust the exposure level in the Auto Exposure mode. (It will runfor about 30 seconds.)

1156D142CA 1156D144CA

While the copier is in the adjustment cycle, the Start Key is lit up orange. The key turns green as soon

as the adjustment cycle is completed.

6. After the adjustment, touch Menu to return the copier to the Tech. Rep. menu.

7. Check the optimum exposure setting in the Manual Exposure mode. (See p. D-73.)


D-73

(5) Adjustment of Optimum Exposure Setting in the Manual Exposure Mode Requirement

Exposure Lamp voltage setting range in the Manual Exposure mode ... 44 to 56

When the manual exposure setting is at the central indication, no image of step no. 1 of a Kodak Gray

Scale should be produced on the copy, but a faint image of step no. 2 should be produced.

1136D300AA

Important

This adjustment should be made only after completing the “Adjustment of Exposure Level in the

Auto Exposure Mode” and “Adjustment of the Aperture Blades”.

If the setting has been changed in this adjustment, be sure to make the “adjustment of exposure

level in the Auto Exposure mode”.

1156D137CB


4. Touch Tech. Rep. Choice to show the “Tech. Rep. Choice 1” menu on the screen.

1156D141CA 1156D145CA

1. Place the Kodak Gray Scale lengthwise, facedown, and at the center on the Original Glass.Place a sheet of pure white A3 or 11” 17” pa-per over it and then lower the Original Cover.

2. Set the copier into the Manual Exposure modeand set the exposure setting to the central orfifth indication (EXP5). Make about 3 copiesusing A3 or 11” 17” paper (so that the PCDrum sensitivity stabilizes). Then, check thatthe third copy meets the requirement givenabove.*If the image density is outside the specifica-tions, make the following adjustment.


D-74

5. Touch Next twice to show the “Tech. Rep. Choice 3” menu on the screen.

6. Observing the image density of the sample copy, touch the shift key or to change the setting

for “Image Exposure”.

7. Touch Enter to validate the setting.

8. Run the F5 operation again.

If the image density is low, decrease the setting value.

If the image density is high, increase the setting value.

If the image density does not fall within the specifications through one setting, try another

setting.

Setting Instructions

1156D150CA

Touch This Key Twice.Touch This Keyif ID is High.

Touch This Keyif ID is Low.

1156D146CA

NOTE

Be sure to touch Enter before pressing the Panel Reset Key to return the copier to the Basic screen.If this is not done, the old setting remains valid.


D-75

(6) Adjustment of Zoom Ratio in the Crosswise Direction

(“Adjust A1 = Lens Full Size Position”) Requirement

This adjustment is made for the zoom ratio in the crosswise direction.

A scale is placed on the Original Glass to run parallel with the Scanner and the length of the scale on

the copy is compared with that of the actual scale. The adjustment must be made so that the difference

between the two dimensions falls within the following specifications.

The difference should be within 0.5% of the actual length.

For 200 mm, the allowance is 200 mm 0.005 = 1.0 mm.

Zoom Ratio Specifications Adjusting Mode Setting Range

Full size (1.000) 200 1.0mm Adjust A1 Lens Full Size Position 43 to 58

Important

This adjustment must be made before the “Reference Position Adjustments”.

1134D136AA

1134D124AA

1. Place a scale in parallel with the Original Width Scale andmake a copy.*Make three copies in full size (1.000) mode and using200-mm-or-wider paper.

*If the scale is of plastic and transparent, place a blanksheet of paper over it.

2. Allow the copy to stand for 5 minutes, then measure thelength to determine the zoom ratio in the crosswise direc-tion. (Make the check with the third copy.)Using the scale, measure the length of the scale on thecopy to find any difference.

*If the zoom ratio deviates from the specifications, go to thenext step.


D-76

3. Call the “Adjust 1/2” menu to the screen.

4. Touch the select key or to highlight “A1 Lens Full Size Position”.

1156D138CA 1156D154CA

5. Touch the shift key or to change the set value.


If the scale on the copy is longer than the actual scale, decrease the setting value.

If the scale on the copy is shorter than the actual scale, increase the setting value.

*If the measurement does not fall within the specifications through one setting, try anothersetting.


Touch This Key if Measurement is Shorter.Touch This Key if Measurement is Longer.

Setting Value

1156D147CA

NOTE



D-77

(7) Adjustment of Zoom Ratio in the Feeding Direction

(“Adjust A3 = Feed Direction Mag. Ratio”) Requirement

This adjustment is made for the zoom ratio in the feeding direction.

A scale is placed on the Original Glass perpendicularly to the Scanner and the length of the scale on

the copy is compared with that of the actual scale. The adjustment must be made so that the difference

between the two dimensions falls within the following specifications.

The difference should be within 0.5% of the actual length.

For 300 mm, the allowance is 300 mm 0.005 = 1.5 mm.


Full size (1.000) 300 1.5mm Adjust A3 Feed Direction Mag. Ratio 46 to 54

Important

This adjustment must be made before the “Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration”.

1134D137AA

1138D154AA

1. Place a scale in parallel with the Original Length Scale andmake a copy.*Make three copies in the full size (1.000) mode usingA3 or 11” 17” paper.

*If the scale is of plastic and transparent, place a blanksheet of paper over it.

2. Allow the copy to stand for 3 minutes, then measure thelength to determine the zoom ratio in the feeding direction.(Make the check with the third copy.)Using the scale, measure the length of the scale on thecopy to find any difference.

*If the zoom ratio deviates from the specifications, go to thenext step.


D-78


4. Touch the select key or to highlight “A3 Feed Direction Mag. Ratio”.

1156D138CA 1156D151CA

5. Touch the shift key or to change the set value.


If the scale on the copy is longer than the actual scale, decrease the setting value.

If the scale on the copy is shorter than the actual scale, increase the setting value.

*If the measurement does not fall within the specifications through one setting, try another setting.


Touch This Key if Measurement is Shorter.

Touch This Key if Measurement is Longer.

1156D155CA

NOTE



D-79

(8) Adjustment of Reference Position of the Multi Bypass Table Requirement

Dimension A1134D196AB

Important

This adjustment should be made after the “adjustment of zoom ratio in the crosswise direction”.

1136D030AA

1136D031AA

1156D099AA

Dimension A on the copy of the GTC-test chart should mea-

sure 20 mm 2.0 mm in the full size (1.000) mode.

1. Place the GTC-test chart face down on the Original Glassand align its rear left corner with the reference marker onthe Original Width Scale. Then, lower the Original Cover.

2. Make three copies in the full size (1.000) mode using A3or 11” 17” paper fed from the Multi Bypass Table.

3. Check if dimension A (from the edge up to the referenceline) on the copy is up to the specifications. (Make thecheck with the third copy.)

4. If dimension A deviates from the specifications, loosenthree screws that secure the Multi Bypass Table and movethe table in the direction of the arrow as necessary.

If dimension A on the copy is shorter than 18 mm, move

the table to the front of the copier.

If dimension A on the copy is longer than 22 mm, move

the table to the rear of the copier.

Adjusting Instructions

NOTE

When tightening the screws, hold the Multi Bypass Tablefrom the underside with your hand and tighten screws in theorder shown.When a Duplexing Document Feeder is mounted, itinvolves changing the Original Glass. This in turn resultsin the position of the Original Length Scale beingslightly shifted to the rear. This can nonetheless becorrected with the Original Positioning Plate.


D-80

(9) Adjustment of Reference Position of the 1st/2nd Drawer Requirement

1134D196ABDimension A

Important

This adjustment should be made after the “adjustment of zoom ratio in the crosswise direction”.

1136D030AA

1134D146AA

If dimension A on the copy is longer than 22 mm, move the Positioning Plate to the front of

the copier.

If dimension A on the copy is shorter than 18 mm, move the Positioning Plate to the rear of

the copier.


1139U037AA


sure 20 mm 2.0 mm in the full size (1.000) mode.


2. Feeding three sheets of A3 or 11” 17” paper from the 1stDrawer, make two full-size copies.

3. Check if dimension A (from the edge up to the referenceline) on the third copy is up to the specifications.

4. If dimension A deviates from the specifications, slide outthe 1st Drawer. Then, loosen the three screws shown onthe left and move the Drawer Positioning Plate to the frontor rear as necessary. (Use the same procedure for the 2ndDrawer.)

5. After the adjustment, loosen the four screws shown on theleft and adjust the position (tilt) of the Drawer Cover.


D-81

(10) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration Requirement

1138D170AA

Dimension A


Full size (1.000) 20 1.5mm Adjust A4 Lens Position Full Size

Enlargement(2.000) 40 3.0mm Adjust A11 Lens Position

Enlargement 40 to 60

Reduction(0.500) 10 1.5mm Adjust A5 Lens Position

Reduction

Important

This adjustment should be made after the “adjustment of zoom ratio in the feeding direction”.

(1) Leading Edge Registration in Full Size Mode

1136D033AA


sure as follows at the respective zoom ratios.


2. Make three single copies on A3 or 11” 17” paper in fullsize mode and check the third copy for leading edge regis-tration.(If the registration is up to the specifications, go to the ad-justment in the enlargement mode. If it deviates from thespecifications, perform the following steps to make the ad-justment of leading edge registration in the full size mode.)


D-82


4. Touch the select key or to highlight “A4 Scan Regist Full Size”.

1156D148CA1156D138CA

5. Touch the shift key or to change the setting value.


If dimension A on the copy is longer than 21.5 mm, increase the setting value.

If dimension A on the copy is shorter than 18.5 mm, decrease the setting value.





1156D152CA

NOTE

Be sure to touch Enter before pressing the Panel Reset Key to return the copier to the Basicscreen. If this is not done, the old setting remains valid.


D-83

(2) Leading Edge Registration in Enlargement Mode Important

This adjustment should be made after the “adjustment of leading edge registration in the full size

mode”.

1136D034AA

2. With the “Adjust 1/2” menu on the screen, touch Next to show the “Adjust 2/2” menu.

3. Touch the select key or to highlight “A11 Scan Regist Enlargement”.

1156D156CA1156D166CA

1. After the leading edge registration in the full size mode hasbeen adjusted, make three single copies on A3 or 11”17” paper at 2.000 and check the 3rd copy for leadingedge registration.(If the registration is up to the specifications, go to the ad-justment in the reduction mode. If it deviates from the spec-ifications, perform the following steps to make the adjust-ment of leading edge registration in the enlargementmode.)


D-84







Touch This Key if Measurement is Longer.Touch This Key if Measurement is Shorter.

1156D149CA

NOTE



D-85

(3) Leading Edge Registration in Reduction Mode

1136D035AA

Important

This adjustment should be made after the “adjustment of leading edge registration in the full size mode”.


3. Touch the select key or to highlight “A5 Scan Regist Reduction”.

1156D138CA 1156D153CA

1. After the leading edge registration in the enlargementmode has been adjusted, make three single copies on A3or 11” 17” paper at 0.500 and check the 3rd copy forleading edge registration.(If the registration deviates from the specifications, per-form the following steps to make the adjustment of leadingedge registration in the reduction mode.)


D-86








1156D157CA

NOTE



D-87

(11) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration for Book Second Page Requirement

1136D036AA

Important

This adjustment should be made after the “adjustment of the leading edge registration”.

1136D037AA

2. On the Basic screen, touch Origi. Copy ; then, select Separation .

1156D140CA 1156D158CA

3. Select Book 1 and make three single copies on A4 crosswise paper at full size (1.000)

mode. Check the third copy for the leading edge registration. (If the dimensions deviate from the speci-fications, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.)

1156D161CA

Dimension A on the copy of a test chart (A3 or 11” 17”) as

shown on the left should measure 20 3.0 mm and B equals

C.

Setting range: 45 to 55

1. Place the test chart face down on the Original Glass andalign its rear left corner with the reference marker on theOriginal Width Scale. Then, lower the Original Cover.


D-88

4. With the “Adjust 1/2” menu on the screen, touch Next to show the “Adjust 2/2” menu. Then, high-

light “A6 Book B-Scan Regist”.

1156D163CA1156D166CA



If dimension A on the copy is longer than 23 mm, increase the setting value.

If dimension A on the copy is shorter than 17 mm, decrease the setting value.

*If the measurement does not fall within the specifications through one setting, try another

setting.




1156D163CA

NOTE



D-89

(12) Adjustment of the Image Leading Edge Erase Width Requirement

1134D135AA

Dimension A

Important

This adjustment should be made after the “adjustment of the leading edge registration” and

“adjustment of the leading edge registration for book second page”.

1136D040AA


4. Touch the select key or to highlight “A12 Leading Edge Erase Adjust”.

1156D159CA1156D166CA

The erase width, dimension A, on the copy of the GTC–test

chart should measure 1.0 to 6.5 mm.

Setting range: 45 to 55


2. Make three single copies on A3 or 11” 17” paper in fullsize mode and check the third copy for leading edge erasewidth.(If the erase width deviates from the specifications, per-form the following steps to make the adjustment of imageleading edge erase width.)


D-90



If dimension A on the copy is longer than 6.5 mm, decrease the setting value.

If dimension A on the copy is shorter than 1.0 mm, increase the setting value.




1156D162CA

NOTE



D-91

(13) Adjustment of the Image Trailing Edge Erase Width Requirement

1134D134AA

Dimension A

Important

This adjustment should be made after the “adjustment of the image leading edge erase width”.

Before this adjustment can be made, “Trailing Edge Erase” on the “Tech. Rep. Choice 2” screen

must be set to “Yes”.

1136D042AA


4. Touch the select key or to highlight “A13 Trailing Edge Erase Adjust”.

1156D166CA 1156D164CA

The erase width, dimension A, on the copy of the GTC-test

chart should measure 0.5 to 5.5 mm.

Setting range: 42 to 58.


2. Make three single copies on A3 or 11” 17” paper in fullsize mode and check the third copy for trailing edge erasewidth.(If the erase width deviates from the specifications, per-form the following steps to make the adjustment of imagetrailing edge erase width.)


D-92



If dimension A on the copy is longer than 5.5 mm, decrease the setting value.

If dimension A on the copy is shorter than 0.5 mm, increase the setting value.

*If the measurement does not fall within the specifications through one setting, try anothersetting.



1156D160CA

NOTE



D-93

(14) Adjustment of Edge Erase Requirement

1136D043AA

Important

This adjustment must be made after the “adjustments of reference positions”.

1136D044AA

1134D114AA

Dimension A, which is the erase width from the front edge on

the copy of the GTC-test chart, should be in the range be-

tween 0.5 mm and 4.0 mm.


2. Make a single copy on A3 or 11” 17” paper in full sizemode.*If A3 or 11” 17” paper is not available, use A4 or 8–1/2”11” crosswise paper.

3. If the front edge erase width deviates from the specifica-tions, adjust as necessary by turning the Edge Erase Ad-justing Screw.

If dimension A on the copy (of the original width of 3.0 mm)

is narrower than 0.5 mm, tighten the Adjusting Screw.

If dimension A on the copy (of the original width of 3.0 mm)

is wider than 3.0 mm, loosen the Adjusting Screw.



D-94

3-7. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

(1) Focus-Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage Requirement

With the Scanner positioned correctly with reference to the Scanner Drive Cable, there should be nogap between one end of the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jig and the Scanner, and betweenthe other end of the jig and the Mirrors Carriage. The distance between the Scanner and Mirrors Carriageshould be 83.5 mm.

1134D138AA

1136D046AA

Scanner Positioning Jig

Scanner/Mirrors

Carriage Positioning

Jig 1136D047AA

1136D048AA

83.5mm

1. Remove the Original Cover, Upper Rear Cover, and Origi-nal Glass.

2. Slide the Scanner to a position at which the hole is alignedwith the Scanner Positioning Screw.

3. Insert a screwdriver into the hole and loosen the ScannerPositioning Screw. (This allows the Scanner Drive Cableto move independently of the Scanner.)

4. Align the rectangular hole in the upper copier frame withthe U-groove in the Scanner. Insert the Scanner Position-ing Jig.

5. Install the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jig be-tween the Scanner and the Mirrors Carriage.

6. Move the Mirrors Carriage in the direction of the arrow.7. Check that both ends of the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage

Positioning Jig have no gap.


D-95

1139D051AA

8. Tighten the Scanner Positioning Screw which was loos-ened in step 3.


D-96

(2) Adjustment of the Gap Between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller

(D.B. Adjustment) Requirement

The gap between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller should be 0.53 0.05 mm.

1136D049AA

1136D050AA

1136D051AA

1136D052AA

1. Remove the IU, PC Drum Charge Corona, and PC Drum.2. Remove two screws and the Developer Scattering Pre-

vention Plate.

3. Using a brush, whisk developer off the surface of theSleeve Roller.

4. Install the Sleeve/Magnet Roller Positioning Jig into the IU.

5. Loosen three screws that secure the Doctor Blade. Insertthe D.B. Adjusting Jigs between the Doctor Blade andSleeve Roller.

6. Press down the Doctor Blade until it positively contacts theD.B. Adjusting Jigs. Then, tighten the three screws to se-cure the Doctor Blade.


D-97

(3) Adjustment of the PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Position Requirement

The gap between the PC Drum and Paper Separator Fingers should be 1.0 0.5 mm when SeparatorSolenoid SL1 is in the deenergized position.

Important

Use care not to deform the Separator Fingers during the adjustment procedure.

1136D053AA

1136D054AA

1136D055AA

1136D056AA

1. Attach the PC Drum Paper Separator Finger PositioningJig to the IU.

2. Using an Allen wrench, adjust the position of one of the twoPaper Separator Fingers. (Either one will do.)

With the solenoid in the deenergized position, the tip of the finger should be at a point between A and B, preferably more on the B end.

With the solenoid energized, the tip of the finger should touch C.

A 41.5 mm. . . . . . . B 40.5 mm. . . . . . . C 40.0 mm. . . . . . .


3. After this adjustment, check that the other finger alsomeets the above requirement.

NOTE

If the fingers cannot be positioned correctly through steps 2 and 3, loosen the two solenoid mounting screws and adjust the position of the solenoid. Then,repeat steps 2 and 3.


D-98

(4) Adjustment of Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4

1134D119AA

1134D120AA

4. Slowly move the SL4 in the direction opposite that in step 3. When the two Stoppers just swing intothe upright position, tighten the two SL4 mounting screws.

1134D121AA

1. Remove the SL4 mounting bracket. (For the removalsteps, see p. D-25.)

2. Manually bring SL4 into the energized position (plungerpushed in).* A click is heard when the solenoid is energized.

Then, hold the plunger in position.

3. Loosen two screws that secure the SL4 and slide SL4 allthe way in the direction of the arrow.


D-99

(5) Adjustment of Exit/Duplex Solenoid SL5 Requirement

With the lever in contact with the stopper (SL5 in the deenergized position), the gap between the plungerrubber washer and the solenoid should be 4.0 to 4.5 mm.

Important

After the adjustment, move the plunger manually to check that it moves smoothly and the SwitchingPlate swings up and down properly.

1134D122AA

3. Bring the lever into contact with the stopper. Keeping that position, move SL5 so that the gap betweenthe plunger rubber washer and solenoid measures 4.0 to 4.5 mm. When the specified dimension isreached, tighten the two SL5 mounting screws.

1156D173AA

1. Open the Left Door.2. Loosen two screws that secure SL5.


D-100

MISCELLANEOUS4

4-1. Installation of the Plug-In Counter (Option) Mounting Bracket

1156D033AA

1156D034AA

1136D060AA

1136D061AA

1136D062AA

1. Open the Right Door.2. Remove two screws and the cover.3. Remove the harness from the locking wiring saddle.4. Unplug three connectors.

5. Remove two screws and the Right Door.

6. Remove the Counter Cover.7. Remove four screws and the Right Cover.

8. Remove the IU.9. Remove two screws and the cover.

10. Connect the Plug-In Counter connector.11. Secure the Plug-In Counter Mounting Bracket with the two

screws.NOTE

When the Plug-In Counter is mounted, be sure to turn “ON” the “Plug-In Counter” of “System Input” available from the Tech. Rep. mode.


D-101

4-2. ADJUSTMENT OF THE RIGHT DOORIf the Right Door has been removed and reinstalled, the position of the actuator of Right Upper Door Interlock

Switch S22 may deviate from the correct position. Hence, the necessity of the following adjustment.

1156D100AA

1134D116AA

1134D117AA

1134D118AA

1. Mount the Right Door with two screws. (At this time, onlytemporarily tighten these screws.)

2. Lightly close the Right Door so that the S22 actuator willnot contact the frame.

3. Due to its own weight, the front end of the Right Door tendsto hang lower. Lifting the front end slightly, tighten the twomounting screws.

4. Open and close the Right Door two to three times to checkthat the S22 actuator properly actuates and deactuatesS22.



Printed in Japan


1156-7992-11 97046000

1156SBD000EA

Interleaf EP5000/EP4000 SWITCHES ON PWBs, TECH. REP. SETTINGS97.04.01

1156SBS000AA


i

1156SBS000BA

CONTENTS

PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs1 S-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1. Precautions for Transportation and Storage S-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2. Precautions for Replacement and Inspection S-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND TOUCH PANEL2 S-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1. Control Panel Keys S-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2. Explanation of the Touch Panel S-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FUNCTIONS OF SWITCHES AND POINTS ON PWB-I3 S-5. . . . . . . . . . .

3-1. PWB-I Location S-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2. Tech. Rep. Settings Switches Board PWB-I S-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

USER’S CHOICE MODE4 S-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1. User’s Choice Selection Screen S-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2. User’s Choice Function Setting Procedure S-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3. User’s Choice Function Tree S-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4. Settings in the User’s Choice S-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TECH. REP. MODE5 S-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1. Tech. Rep. Mode Menu Screen S-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2. Tech. Rep. Mode Function Setting Procedure S-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3. Tech. Rep. Mode Function Tree S-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4. Settings in the Tech. Rep. Mode S-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Function S-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Tech. Rep. Choice S-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. System Input S-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Counter S-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. I/O Check S-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Last Trouble S-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. ROM Version S-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. RD Mode S-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. Accessory Test S-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. Level History S-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. Machine Status S-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. Admin. Mode S-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


ii

CONTENTS

FACTORY SETTING6 S-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1. Factory Setting Menu Screen S-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2. Factory Setting Function Setting Procedure S-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3. Factory Setting Function Tree S-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Function S-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Adjust S-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


S-1

1151SBS0100A

PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs11151SBS0101A

1-1. Precautions for Transportation and Storagea) Before transporting or storing the PWBs, put them in protective conductive cases or bags so that they

are not subjected to high temperature (and they are not exposed to direct sunlight).b) Protect the PWBs from any external force so that they are not bent or damaged.c) Once the PWB has been removed from its conductive case or bag, never place it directly on an object

that is easily charged with static electricity (such as a carpet or plastic bag).d) Do not touch the parts and printed patterns on the PWBs with bare hands.

1151SBS0102A

1-2. Precautions for Replacement and Inspectiona) Whenever replacing the PWB, make sure that the power cord of the copier has been unplugged.b) When the power is on, the connectors must not be plugged in or unplugged.c) Use care not to strap the pins of an IC with a metal tool.d) When touching the PWB, wear a wrist strap and connect its cord to a securely grounded place when-

ever possible. If you cannot wear a wrist strap, touch the metal part to discharge static electricity be-fore touching the PWB.


S-2

1149SBS0200A

CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND TOUCH PANEL2* For more details, see the “Operator’s Manual” shipped with the copier.

1149SBS0201A

2-1. Control Panel Keys

1149O002EA

Display Contrast Knob Varies the brightness of the Touch Panel.

User Mode Key Changes the screen to the User Mode set-

ting screen.

Touch Panel Shows various screens and messages.

10-Key Pad Numeric keypad used for entering the

number of copies to be made, zoom ratio,access number, and the Tech. Rep. modesettings.

Access Mode Key When either “100 Accounts” or “1000 Ac-

counts” has been selected for the “CopyTrack” function, the entry of the accessnumber and the press of this key (AccessMode) will allow the user to make copies.

Energy Saver Key Sets the copier into the Energy Saver

mode.

Interrupt Key Sets the copier into, or lets it leave, the In-

terrupt mode.

Panel Reset Key Clears all control panel settings made pre-

viously, initializing the copier.Note: It does not, however, clear the con-

tents of the zoom and job programmemory and the settings made im-mediately before the Interruptmode.

Clear Key Clears the number-of-copies setting, zoom

ratio, and counter count.

Stop Key Stops a copy cycle.

Start Key Starts a copy cycle.

Mode Check Key Shows the Mode Check screen on which

the user can check the current copying set-tings.

Job Recall Key Selects the Job Recall screen which allows

the user to recall or check a copy-job pro-gram previously stored in memory.


S-3

1149SBS0202A

2-2. Explanation of the Touch Panel

1149SBS020201A

1. Basic Screen The Basic screen is an initial screen that appears when the copier is turned ON, panel is reset, or when

auto clear is activated.

1149O263CA

Supplementary Function Keys Selects the corresponding menu screen,

either Auxiliary, Finishing, or Orig. Copy.

Message Display Shows the current copier status, operating

instructions, and other data including thenumber of copies selected and the amountof paper still available for use.

Basic Function Keys Allows the user to select the exposure lev-

el, zoom ratio, and copy paper.

Function Display Shows graphic representations of the set-

tings currently made for Orig. Copy andFinishing.


S-4

1149SBS020202A

2. Warning Screens The warning screen may be a malfunction display, error display, warning display, or a caution display.

<Malfunction Display> A malfunction display is given when trouble

occurs which cannot be corrected by the user.Example: Malfunction that can be identified

with a specific code.

<Error Display> An error display is given when trouble occurs

which can be corrected by the user.Examples: Paper misfeed, toner empty, door

open.

1149O387CA1149O421CA

<Warning Display> <Caution Display>

1149O422CA 1149O385CA

A warning display is given when any furthercopier operation will not be possible, or onlyfaulty results will come out, due to erroneouspanel settings or other cause. Example: Unmatched paper size in Auto Paper

A caution display is given when, though furthercopier operation will be possible, it could resultin a malfunction. Example: Toner empty


S-5

1151SBS0300A

FUNCTIONS OF SWITCHES AND POINTS ON PWB-I31151SBS0301A

3-1. PWB-I Location

1156S001AA

1156SBS0302A

3-2. Tech. Rep. Settings Switches Board PWB-I

1149S002BB

Symbol Name Description

S1Trouble Reset Switch Resets a malfunction including those of the Exposure

Lamp (C04XX) and fusing (C05xx).

PJ2

Initialize Switch Forcibly resets a misfeed or malfunction that occurrs due to incorrect operation, etc. when it cannot be resetby opening and closing the Front Door or the press ofS1.

TP1 GND Test Point Ground terminal used for memory clear.

TP3Memory Clear Test Point Initializes all data except the counts of electronic count-

ers, access numbers and administrator number for CopyTrack, and RD mode functions.


S-6

<Clearing Procedures> Initialize Points PJ2

1. Turn OFF the Power Switch.2. With PJ2 closed, turn ON the Power Switch.3. In approx. 5 sec. open PJ2.4. Check that the message “Initialize completed” is shown on the Touch Panel, then touch “Enter.”

Memory Clear Test Point TP31. Turn OFF the Power Switch.2. With the circuit across TP1 and 3 closed, turn ON the Power Switch.3. In approx. 5 sec. open the circuit across TP1 and 3.4. Check that the message “Memory Clear completed” is shown on the Touch Panel, then touch “Enter.”

NOTE

If an erratic operation or display occurs, perform the clearing procedures in the order of PJ2 and TP3. When memory clear has been performed, make the necessary settings again.

<List of Data Cleared by Switches and Points>

Clearing MethodData Cleared

Front DoorOpen/Close

Trouble ResetSwitch(S1)

InitializeSwitch(PJ2)

Memory ClearTest Point

(TP3)

Misfeed display

Malfunction display (exceptExposure Lamp and fusingsystem)

Malfunction display (all includ-ing Exposure Lamp and fusingsystem)

Erratic operation/display

User mode

Service mode

F5/F7 setting values

System Input

Accessory Test

Level History

Adjust mode

: Cleared (initialized) : Not cleared:


S-7

1149SBS0400A

USER’S CHOICE MODE4 The User’s Choice mode available through the User Mode menu is used to make various settings ac-

cording to the user’s needs.1149SBS0401A

4-1. User’s Choice Selection Screen

1149O262DA

1149SBS0402A

4-2. User’s Choice Function Setting Procedure<Setting Procedure>

1. Press the User Mode key on the control panel and then touch the “User’s Choice” key.2. Select the page number key that contains the desired function from among 1/6 through 6/6 shown

at the bottom of the Touch Panel.3. Select the function to be set and make settings as required.4. After the settings are complete, touch the “Enter” key to validate the settings.NOTE:The function selected is highlighted.

<Exiting the Mode>Perform any one of the following steps to go back to the Basic screen. Press the Panel Reset key on the control panel. Touch “Exit” on the Touch Panel.


S-8

1156SBS0403A

4-3. User’s Choice Function Tree

User’s Choice

1/6

Mixed Orig. Detection

Language Selection

Paper Priority

Copy Mode Priority

Expo. Mode Priority

Expo. Level Priority

Manual Expo. Adjust

Finishing Priority

Auto Panel Reset

Energy Saver Mode

Drum Dehumidifier

Counter Removal

Intelligent Sort

Confirmation Beep

Original Thickness

Smaller Originals

Custom 2in1

Custom 2in1 Separation

Custom Book Copy

Special Paper

Orig. Copy Default

Auto Power-off Mode

Original on Glass

Administrator Mode

2/6

3/6

4/6

5/6

6/6

Manual feed expansion


S-9

1156SBS0404A

4-4. Settings in the User’s Choice1156SBS040401A

[1/6]

Touch PanelDisplay Setting (The default is .)Highlighted

Mixed Orig.Detection

Select whether to enable (“ON”) the Mixed Original Detection mode or not(“OFF”) when power is turned ON or the Panel Reset key pressed.

ON OFF

Language Selection

English

Select the language of the Touch Panel messages.

French

Dutch Italian Spanish

Portuguese Danish Norwegian

Swedish Finnish Greek

–Metric Areas–

English German French

Japanese Chinese Portuguese

–Inch Areas–

German

Paper Priority Specify the paper source selected automatically.

1st Drawer

2nd Drawer

3rd Drawer

4th Drawer

LCT

Copy Mode Priority Specify the default mode selected automatically when power is turned ON orthe Panel Reset key pressed.

ManualAuto Paper Auto Size

Manual Feed Expansion

Select whether to use Manual feed expansion (“ON”) when using the Multi BypassTray or not (“OFF”)

OFFON


S-10

1156SBS040402A

[2/6]Touch Panel

Display Setting (The default is .)Highlighted

Expo. Mode Priority Specify the default exposure mode selected automatically when power is turnedON or the Panel Reset key pressed.

ManualAuto

Expo. Level Priority Auto: Select the default exposure level in the Auto Exposure mode.Manual: Set the default exposure level in the Manual Exposure mode.

<Auto Exposure>

<Manual Exposure>

NOTE: EXP. 1 (Lighter) to EXP. 9 (Darker)

Lighter Darker

NormalLighter Darker

Normal

Manual Expo.Adjust

Determine the default voltage curve (EXP. level) in the Manual Exposure mode,as optimized by the type of original.

<Manual Exposure Voltages in Different Modes>

NOTE: EXP. 5 uses as reference the voltage value automatically adjusted bythe F5 operation.

Mode 1

Mode 1 Halftone images, photos

Mode 2 Ordinary originals

Mode 3 Originals with a colored back-ground or faint texts

EXP.

Manual Exposure Voltage (V)

Mode 2

Mode 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

+8

+8

+8

+5 +2 +1 0 –1 –2 –5 –8

+6 +4 +2 0 –2 –4 –6 –8

+7 +6 +3 0 –3 –6 –7 –8

Finishing Priority Select the default finishing type when the copier is equipped with a Sorter or Sta-ple Sorter.

Non Sort Group

Sort Sort Staple

+ Hole Punch

NOTE: Hole Punch can becombined with any oneof the functions.


S-11

1156SBS040403A

[3/6]


Auto Panel Reset Specify the default exposure mode selected automatically when power is turnedON or the Panel Reset key pressed.

1 min.30 sec. 2 min.

5 min.3 min. No Reset

Energy Saver Mode Set the time it takes the copier to enter the Energy Saver mode after a copy cyclehas been completed or the last key operated. Use the 10-Key Pad to set the time(1 to 240 min.).

1 to 240 (15 min.) OFF

NOTE: The OFF setting is available for European areas only.

Drum Dehumidifier Select whether to allow the copier to enter the Drum Dehumidifier mode automat-ically after it has been turned ON, or not.

ON OFF

Counter Removal Select whether to reset the panel or not when the Plug-In Counter is pulled outof the copier, a magnetic card is pulled out of the Data Controller, or the AccessMode key is pressed.

ON OFF

1156SBS040404A

[4/6]


Intelligent Sort Select whether to turn “ON” or “OFF” the function that automatically switches be-tween Sort and Non-Sort according to the number of originals loaded in the docu-ment feeder.

ON OFF

NOTE: This function is enabled when “Mixed Orig. Detection” isturned “OFF” and the copier is in the Auto Paper or AutoSize mode.

Confirmation Beep Select whether to turn “ON” or “OFF” the beep that sounds each time a key onthe control panel is pressed or that on the Touch Panel is touched.

ON OFF

Original Thickness Select whether to allow (“Thin”) the user to make copies from thin originals inaddition to the standard ones or not (“Standard”) using the document feeder.

The orginal is pressed against theOriginal Width Scale when stopped.

The original is not pressed against theOriginal Width Scale when stopped.

Standard Thin

Smaller Originals Select whether to enable (“ON”) a copy cycle or not (“OFF”) when it is initiatedby pressing the Start key with an original of the smallest detectable size (metricareas: A5 or smaller; inch areas: Letter or smaller) placed on the Original Glass.

The copy cycle is run using the paperloaded in the default paper source.

A warning message is given and thecopier inhibits the start of this copycycle.

OFFON

NOTE: The default setting is OFF for the metric areas and ON for the inchareas.


S-12

1156SBS040405A

[5/6]Touch Panel

Display Setting (The default is .)Highlighted

Custom 2in1 Make the settings for “Paper,” “Zoom,” “Margin,” and “Erase” that are automati-cally recalled when 2-in-1 copy is selected.

Position: Right Edge, Left Edge, Frame, TopEdge, Center, Frame+Center

Width: Metric areas – 5, 10, 15, 20 mm Inch areas – 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1”

Auto Paper

Function Initial SettingDescription

Paper Auto Paper, sizes of paper loaded in drawers

Metric areas:X0.707

Inch areas:X0.647

Zoom Auto Size, fixed zoom ratios

Margin No margin

Position: Right edge, left edgeMode: Shift-for-Margin, Margin-by-Reduc-

tionWidth: Metric areas – 5, 10, 15, 20 mm

Inch areas – 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1”

EraseNo erase

Make the following selections only whenFrame+Center is selected.Frame: Metric areas – 5, 10, 15, 20 mm

Inch areas – 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1”Center: Metric areas – 5, 10, 15, 20 mm

Inch areas – 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1”

NOTE: The erase width for the Top Edge and for the CD direction of theFrame is only 10mm for the metric areas and 1/2” for the inch areas.

Custom 2in1Separation

Make the settings for “Paper,” “Zoom,” “Margin,” and “Erase” that are auto-matically recalled when 2-in-1 separation copy is selected.


Width: Metric areas – 5, 10, 15, 20 mmInch areas – 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1”


Paper Auto Paper, sizes of paper loaded in drawers

Metric areas:X1.414

Inch areas:X1.294

Zoom Auto Size, fixed zoom ratios

Margin No margin



Inch areas – 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1”

Erase No eraseMake the following selections only whenFrame+Center is selected.Frame: Metric areas – 5, 10, 15, 20 mm


Inch areas – 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1”

NOTE: The erase width for the Top Edge and for the CD direction of the Frameis only 10mm for the metric areas and 1/2” for the inch areas.

1st Drawer


S-13

[5/6]


Custom Book Copy Make the settings for “Paper,” “Zoom,” “Margin,” and “Erase” that are auto-matically recalled when Book copy is selected.


Width: Metric areas – 5, 10, 15, 20 mmInch areas – 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1”


Paper Sizes of paper loaded in drawers

Margin No margin



Inch areas – 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1”

EraseNo erase

Make the following selections only whenFrame+Center is selected.Frame: Metric areas – 5, 10, 15, 20 mm


Inch areas – 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1”

NOTE: The erase width for the Top Edge and for the CD direction of theFrame is only 10mm for the metric areas and 1/2” for the inch areas.

X1.000Zoom Fixed zoom ratios

Special Paper Set up a drawer for special paper loading.

NOTE 1: A warning display is given and the copy cycle is started by pressingof the Start key.

NOTE 2: Enabled only in the 1-sided copying mode.

Normal Insert Sheet

Recycled Not for 2-Sided

Auto PaperType of Paper Automatic Drawer Switching (onlyof paper of the same type)

Normal

Recycled

Insert Sheet

Not for 2-Sided

NOTE 2

NOTE 1

Initial setting: Normal (for all drawers)

NOTE 2

: Enabled : Disabled


S-14

1156SBS040406A

[6/6]


Orig. CopyDefault

Select the type of Orig. Copy setting selected automatically when the copi-er is turned ON or Panel Reset key pressed. If ”Duplex only” is selected for“Simplex/Duplex” of the “Tech. Rep. Choice” function, neither 1 2 nor 1 2in1 are displayed.

NOTE: Some of the functions may not be displayed depending on the type ofoptions the copier is equipped with.

1 2

1 2 in11 1

1 2-2 in1 2 2

Auto Power-OFFMode

Select whether to turn ON or OFF the Auto Shut Off function that shuts downthe copier a given period of time after a copy cycle has been completed or thelast key operated.Selecting “ON” means setting the time it takes the Auto Shut Off function tobe activated, that can range from 1 min. to 240 min.

NOTE: “OFF” is displayed when “Enable” is selected for “Non-Auto Shut off”of the “Administrator Mode” function.

OFF 1 to 240EP4000: 90 min.EP5000: 60 min.

Original on Glass Select whether to turn “ON” or “OFF” the beep that sounds when you attemptto load an original in the document feeder with another one left on the glass.

Beep OFFBeep ON

Administrator Mode The entry of the “Administrator #” set using the Tech. Rep. mode permits thesettings of the following functions.

Copy Track

100 Accounts 1000 AccountsOFF

Select the number of accounts to be controlled.

Copy Track

YES (initialize) NO (do not initialize)

This function is displayed when the above “Copy Track” setting ischanged, prompting you to select whether to initialize (“YES”) thecopy track data so far taken or not (“NO”)

Copy Track Data When “Count Reset” is touched, it clears all data under control.


S-15

[6/6]


1/25⋅⋅⋅22/25

<100 Accounts>The copy track data of the selected page is displayed (Account No., TotalCounter, Size Counter, Limit, ID).“Count Reset” : Clears the total and size counters of all accounts.“No.” : Enter the set account number from the 10–Key Pad.“Total” : Displays the count of the Total Counter. (It can also be

cleared with the Clear key.)“Size” : Displays the count of the Size Counter. (It can also be

cleared with the Clear key.)“Limit” : Enter the maximum number of copies that can be made from

the 10-Key Pad.“ID #” : Enter the access number (0001 to 9999) from the 10-Key

Pad.

1~⋅⋅⋅901~

<1000 Accounts>The copy track data of the selected page is displayed.“Count Reset” : Clears the total counters of all accounts.“Total” : Displays the count of the Total Counter. (It can also be

cleared with the Clear key.)NOTE: The entry of an access number is not possible, with 1 to 1000 corre-

sponding to the ID numbers.

Max. Copy Sets Determine the number of copies or copy sets that can be set using the 10-KeyPad.

Non-Auto Shut off

“OFF” key is not displayed.OFF

Select whether to enable or disable the Auto Power-off Mode setting availablefrom User’s Choice.

Disable

“OFF” key is displayed.Enable

User Help* Displayed when

a DT-103 ismounted.

<Transmission Procedure>1. Using the “ or ” key, select the user claim number and then, from the

10-Key Pad, enter the 3-digit user claim code (up to six entries are pos-sible).

2. Touch “Data Send” to start the transmission.


S-16

1149SBS0500A

TECH. REP. MODE5 This mode is used by the Tech. Rep. to set, check, adjust, and/or program various service functions.

1149SBS0501A

5-1. Tech. Rep. Mode Menu Screen

1149O423CB

1149SBS0502A

5-2. Tech. Rep. Mode Function Setting Procedure<Setting Procedure>1. Set the copier into the Tech. Rep. mode by pressing the following keys in this order.

2. Select the particular Tech. Rep. mode function to be set.3. Make the necessary settings by following the instructions given sequentially on the screen.NOTE: The function selected is highlighted.

<Exiting the Mode> Press the Panel Reset key on the control panel.

Stop key 0 Stop key 1


S-17

1156SBS0503A

5-3. Tech. Rep. Mode Function Tree

Tech. Rep.Mode

Function

Tech. Rep.Choice

System Input

Counter

F1 Paper PassageF3 Exp. LampF5 Optimum & AEF7 Orig. SensorDeveloper

Paper Path Sensors

F8 ATDC AdjustFF F8+F5

Key CounterSize CounterTotal CounterMaintenance CallCopy Kit CounterToner Empty StopType of Vendor

Tech. Rep. Choice 1

Auto Paper Config.Leading Edge EraseTrailing Edge EraseLoop Adjust (Drawer)Loop Adjust (Man)Function Limit

Tech. Rep. Choice 2

Image ExposureSimplex/DuplexBin MovementUniversal Tray 13”xUniversal Tray 14”xAutomatic feeding adjustStack

Tech. Rep. Choice 3

Change Fixed Zoom RatioPaper Size InputMarketing AreaKey CounterTelephone # Input

PaperJamRetryTrouble

Counter Reset

MaintenancePort/OptionConsumablesAuto CPU Reset


S-18

Tech. Rep.Mode

I/O Check

RD Mode

Accessory Test

Level History

IC Port Data CheckPaper Path Sensors CheckMemory CheckController Board CheckPanel Indication Check

ADF CheckSorter Check

Last Trouble

Rom Version

Machine Status

Admin. Mode


S-19

1149SBS0504A

5-4. Settings in the Tech. Rep. Mode1149SBS050401A

1. Function This function allows the Tech. Rep. to make the various functional tests and adjustments.

<Setting Procedure>1. Select the particular function to be run.2. Press the Start key to start the test.3. Press the Stop key to stop the test.

Tech. Rep. Mode Function

Touch Panel Display Operation

F1 Paper Passage A paper passage test is carried out to check for correct sensor operationwithout having to wait for the copier to complete warming up.<Procedure>1. Before entering the Tech. Rep. Mode, select the paper feed source, then

touch “Paper Path Sensors.”2. Press the Start key. This starts a paper take-up and feeding sequence and

the copier shows “1” or “0” depending on the condition of each sensor.NOTE: Pressing the Stop key causes the copier to feed the paper out of it

and stop operating; another press of the Start key will resume thepaper take-up and feeding sequence.

F3 Exp. Lamp Checks to see if the Exposure Lamp lights up properly. (It runs for 30 sec.)

F5 Optimum & AE Makes the following automatic adjustments: Vg level, Manual exposure leveland AE Sensor optimum exposure level. (It runs for 30 sec.)<Procedure>1. Touching “F5” automatically brings you to the next screen (AE level adjust-

ment screen).2. Using the or key, show the desired number (44 to 56) and press the

Start key. This starts the automatic adjustment sequence.3. Touch “Test Copy” to check for image.

F7 Orig. Sensor Makes an automatic adjustment of the Original Size Detecting Sensors.

Developer When “Developer” is pressed, “F8” and “FF” functions are displayed anddisappear when the corresponding operation has been completed.

F8 ATDC Adjust Runs the Developing Unit to agitate developer and makes an automaticadjustment of the ATDC Sensor level. (It runs for 5 min.)

FF F8 + F5 Runs the F8 and F5 operations.


S-20

1156SBS050402A

2. Tech. Rep. Choice This function allows the Tech. Rep. to make various settings and adjustments.

Tech. Rep. Mode Tech. Rep. Choice


Key Counter Select the condition by which the Key Counter count is increased.

# of Sheets Copy Cycle

NOTE: See the Count-up Table for details.

Size Counter Select the size of the paper to be counted by the Size Counter.


No Count A3

A3/B4 A3/B4/FLS

Metric Areas

No Count 11X17

11X17/LGR 11X17/11X14

Inch Areas

Total Counter Select the conditions (paper size and 2-sided copying) by which the TotalCounter count is increased.


Mode 0 1 count per 1 copy cycle

Mode 1Multiple count-up according to paper size and2-sided copying

Mode 2Multiple count-up according to paper size and2-sided copying

<Count-up Table>

Copying

Size

1-Sided 2-Sided

Sizes otherthan those

setSet sizes

Sizes oth-er than

those setSet sizes

Total Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode

0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2

ManualBypass

Total (mechani-cal, electronic)

1 2 11 2 2 2 4 4

2-Sided Total(electronic)

0 0 01 1 41 1 2

2-Sided Size(electronic)

0 0 01 1 40

Key (me-chanical)

1 2 2 2 4 41

1 2 2 1 2 2 1 4 41

2 1

1

Size(electronic)

0 0 01 1 2 2 2 0

Countingcopy cycles

Countingcopies

0: No count 1: 1 count 2: 2 counts 4: 4 counts


S-21



Maintenance Call Select whether to enable or disable the maintenance call reminder mes-sage that is displayed when the maintenance counter count reaches thepreset value.

NO YES

NOTE: Up to five maintenance counters may be set and the maintenancecall reminder message is given when the count of any one ofthese five counters reaches the preset value, together with thedisplay of maintenance code “M1.”

Copy Kit Counter Select whether to enable or disable the “Copy Kit” counter; if the counter isto be enabled, select whether to allow or inhibit the start of a copy cyclewhen the count reaches the preset value.

NOTE: The Copy Kit counter is enabled by selecting mode 1 or 2. Whenthe count reaches the preset value, the maintenance code “M4” isdisplayed.

NO Disables the Copy Kit counter.

Mode 1Copying not inhibited after the count reachesthe preset value.

Mode 2Copying inhibited after the count reaches thepreset value.

Toner Empty Stop Select whether or not to inhibit copying when a toner-empty condition isdetected.

Enable Copy Disable Copy

NOTE: When “Disable Copy” is selected, copying is inhibited when a T/Cof 2.5% or less is detected.

Type of Vendor

NOTE: Select “Key Counter.” No other setting should be made.

Make the display setting according to the type of optional vendor mountedon the copier. (Japan only)

Key Counter Disables the Copy Kit counter.

Coin Vendor

Card Vendor

Auto Paper Config. Select either “Inch/Metric” or “Metric” for rounding off the original sizedetected.

Inch/Metric The measurement is rounded to thenearest standard inch or metricsize.

Metric The measurement is rounded to thenearest standard metric size.


S-22



Leading Edge Erase Select whether to enable (“Yes”) or disable (“No”) the leading edge erase.

NO YES

Trailing Edge Erase Select whether to enable (“Yes”) or disable (“No”) the trailing edge erase.

NO YES

Loop Adjust (Drawer) Adjust the length of the loop before the Synchronizing Rollers to be formedin paper fed from the copier drawer.

Display

Description

47484950

Loop length approx. 1 mm




Display

Description

515253




Loop Adjust (Man) Adjust the length of the loop before the Synchronizing Rollers to be formedin paper fed via the Multi Bypass Tray or a paper feeder option.

Display

Description

47484950





Display

Description

515253




Function Limit Select whether to limit (“ON”) the functions that can be set on the controlpanel or not (“OFF”).

ONFunctions that can be set are limited to thenumber of copies to be made, paper size,zoom ratio, and exposure level only.

OFF All functions can be set.


S-23



Image Exposure Vary the Vg voltage to set the desired image density.

Display

Description

47484950

Vg –90VVg –60VVg –30VVg 0V

Display

Description

51525354

Vg +30VVg +60VVg +90VVg +120V

Simplex/Duplex Select the copying mode types that can be selected in “Orig. CopyDefault” of User’s Choice.

Both Permits selection of all copying modes.

Duplex only Permits selection of 2-sided copying modes only.

Bin Movement Select whether or not the Sort Bins will automatically move upwardafter the last copy is ejected into the Bins.

OFF

After the last copy, the Sort Bins automaticallymove upward.

ON

After the last copy, the Sort Bins do not move upward.

Universal Tray 13”x Set the inch size of paper to be used in the Universal Tray.

8 8” 8”

Universal Tray 14”x Set the inch size of paper to be used in the Universal Tray.

8 8”

Automatic feeding adjust

Select whether to display the number of originals that need to be returnedwhen a jam occurs while using the ADF.

NOYES

Stack Select whether or not the Sorter automatically stacks the copy sets afterthe last copy is ejected into the Sort Bins when there are 20 or fewercopy sets made in non-staple mode.

Mode 2

The copy sets are not stacked.Mode 1

The copy sets are stacked.


S-24

1149SBS050403A

3. System Input This function allows the Tech. Rep. to change the fixed zoom ratios, set the paper size, define the mar-

keting area, configure for the Key Counter, and input the telephone number.

Tech. Rep. Mode System Input


Change Fixed ZoomRatio

Change a fixed zoom ratio to a desired value in the range between X0.500and X2.000.<Procedure>1. Select the fixed zoom ratio to be changed and clear the setting by pressing

the Clear key.Note: If a ratio is mistakenly cleared, pressing the Panel Reset key will

recover the ratio.2. Enter the new zoom ratio from the 10-Key Pad.3. Touch “Enter” to validate the new setting.

Paper Size Input Set the size of the paper used in each paper source.<Procedure>1. Select the paper source for which the paper size is to be set (on the Paper

Size Input 1/2 screen).2. Then, the Paper Size Input 2/2 screen appears. Using the or key,

select the paper size.3. Touch “Enter” to validate the paper size setting.

Marketing Area Select the marketing area to set the paper size and fixed zoom ratios.

MJ MC MH Other Areas

Note: Be sure to initialize the copier after the marketing area has beenselected.

Key Counter Select whether or not to inhibit copying if a Key Counter is not insertedwhen the copier is equipped with a Key Counter.

Note: Be sure to select “ON” when the copier is equipped with a KeyCounter.

ON Inhibits copying if the Key Counter is not inserted.

Permits copying even if the Key Counter is not inserted.OFF

Telephone # Input Input the telephone number that will appear on the Touch Panel when amalfunction occurs in the copier.<Procedure>1. Enter the phone number (consisting of up to 19 digits) from the 10-Key

Pad.Note: Use the Interrupt key to enter a hyphen “–.”2. Touch “OK” to validate the phone number setting.


S-25

1156SBS050404A

4. Counter This function shows the counts of the various counters, thus aiding the Tech. Rep. in performing service

jobs.

<Setting Procedure>1. Select “Counter”.2. Select the desired counter function.3. Clear or set the count according to the instructions given on the screen.

<Clearing All Counts of a Counter Type at Once>1. Touch the “Counter Reset” key.2. Select the type of counter to be cleared all at once.3. Touch “Enter”. This clears all counts of the counter selected.

Tech. Rep. Mode Counter


Paper Shows the number of copies made on each paper size or type (S0: stan-dard paper; S1: recycled paper; S2: special paper; S3: disabling 2-sidedcopying).

<Paper 1/2>

Paper Size

A3 11 X 17

B4 11 X 14

A4 Legal

B5 Letter

A5 5X8

FLS

Paper Type

S0

S1

S2

S3

<Paper 2/2>

Note: For a paper size that can beloaded both lengthwise andcrosswise, the count repre-sents the sum of both. (Ex.:A4 lengthwise/crosswise)

<Clearing a Count>Using the or key, highlight the count to be cleared, then press theClear key.Note: If a count is accidentally cleared, pressing the Interrupt key will

undo the clear operation.


S-26


Touch PanelDisplay Operation

Jam Shows the number of misfeeds that have occurred in different parts of thecopier system including MCBJ (system, copier only, ADF).

<Jam Counter 1/3>

Display Description Display Description

MCBJ(System)

Misfeed occurrencerate of the entire sys-tem

1st Drawer No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the 1stDrawer of the copier

MCBJ (Ma-chine Only)

Misfeed occurrencerate of the copier only

2nd Drawer No. of misfeeds thatoccured at the 2ndDrawer of the copier

MCBJ(ADF)

Misfeed occurrencerate of the ADF only

3rd Drawer No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the 3rdDrawer of the copier

ManualFeed

No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the MultiBypass Tray

4th Drawer No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the 4thDrawer of the copier

Note 1: MCBJ (System)

MCBJ (Machine Only)

MCBJ (ADF)

Note 2: A minus sign “–” is appended when the denominator is “0” for eachMCBJ.

: Total Counter value divided by the sum ofJam Counter values

: Total Counter value divided by the sum ofcopier Jam Counter values

: No. of originals fed through the ADF dividedby the sum of ADF Jams.

<Jam Counter 2/3>


5th Drawer No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the 5thDrawer of the copier

Dup Entrance No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the en-trance of the DuplexUnit

VerticalTrans.

No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the trans-port section of the copi-er

Dup Exit No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the papertake-up section of theDuplex Unit

HorizontalTrans.

No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the paperseparator section ofthe copier

Sorter No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the finish-ing option

Exit Section No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the exitsection of the copier

ADF Feed No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the docu-ment take-up sectionof the ADF


S-27



Jam <Jam Counter 3/3>


ADFTransport

No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the trans-port section of the ADF

ADF Reverse No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the turn-over section of theADF

SADF Feed No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the SADF

<Clearing a Count>Using the or key, highlight the count to be cleared, then press the Clearkey.Note: If a count is accidentally cleared, pressing the Interrupt key will undo the

clear operation.

ADF Exit No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the exitsection of the ADF

Stack No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the sorterstacking

LCT No. of misfeeds thatoccurred at the LCT

Retry


clear operation.


1st Drawer No. of paper take-upretries at the 1st Draw-er of the copier

5th Drawer No. of paper take-upretries at the 5th Draw-er of the copier

2nd Drawer No. of paper take-upretries at the 2ndDrawer of the copier

Dup No. of paper take-upretries at the DuplexUnit

3rd Drawer No. of paper take-upretries at the 3rd Draw-er of the copier

Manual Feed No. of paper take-upretries at the Multi By-pass Tray

Shows the number of paper take-up retries carried out at different papersources.

4th Drawer No. of paper take-upretries at the 4th Draw-er of the copier

LCT No. of paper take-upretries at the LCT

Trouble

<Trouble Counter 1/6>

Shows the number of malfunctions that have occurred in different parts of thecopier system.

MalfunctionCode

Location MalfunctionCode

Location

C000XC0040C0046/7C004A/b

Main Drive MotorSuction Fan MotorFusing Cooling FanOptical Cooling Fan

C004C/dC0070/1C0072C0200

Ventilation FanMain Hopper MotorSub Hopper MotorPC Charge Corona


S-28



Trouble<Trouble 2/6>

MalfunctionCode


Location

C03XXC04XXC050XC0510

Control Board/HarnessExposure LampFuser Warm-UpFuser Low Temp.

C0520C0600C0610C0620

Fuser High Temp.Scanner Drive Syst.Lens Drive SystemMirror Drive System

<Trouble 3/6>

MalfunctionCode


Location

C06FXC07XXC090XC091X

Scanner InterfaceADF3rd Drawer2nd Drawer

C092XC095XC0990 - 6C0998 - F

1st Drawer4th DrawerLCC Main-TrayLCC Shift-Tray

<Trouble 4/6>

MalfunctionCode


Location

C09CXC0E0XC0E20C0F02

LCTMain Erase LampAuxil. Erase LampOrig. Size Det. CPU

C0F10C0F2XC0F3XC0F79

EE SensorAIDC SensorATDC SensorPaper Empty Sensor

<Trouble 5/6>


clear operation.

MalfunctionCode


Location

C0FE/FXC0b0XC0b10 - 3C0b18 - d

Original SensorSorter (Transport)Sorter (Paper Clamp)Original Guide Motor

C0b2XC0b3XC0b4XC0b5X

Sorter (Staple Unit)Sorter (Guide)Sorter (Gate Motor)Sorter (Stapler)

<Trouble 6/6>

MalfunctionCode


Location

C0b6XC0b7XC0d00

Sorter (Bin Shift)Sorter (Punch)Front/Rear Guide

C0d20C0d5X

Dup StorageDup Drive Motor


S-29



Maintenance Five different values (counts) can be set for the Maintenance Counter. Eachcounter is increased by 1 each time a copy is made and, when the presetcount is reached, the maintenance call reminder message and maintenancecode “M1” appear on the Touch Panel.Note: Whether the maintenance call reminder message is given or not de-

pends on the setting made for “Maintenance” of “Tech. Rep. Choice.”Also, copying is not inhibited even when the reminder message ap-pears.

<Setting a Count>1. Using the or key, select the counter to be set.2. Enter the value from the 10-Key Pad.

<Clearing the Set Value/Count>Using the or key, highlight the count to be cleared, then press the Clearkey.Note: If a count is accidentally cleared, pressing the Interrupt key will undo the

clear operation.

Port/option Shows the frequency of use of each of the different parts of the copier includ-ing options to serve as a guideline for the maintenance time for the Tech. Rep.

<Port/Option 1/3>


Manual Feed No. of sheets of paperfed from the Multi By-pass Tray

3rd Drawer No. of sheets of paperfed from the 3rd Draw-er

1st Drawer No. of sheets of paperfed from the 1st Draw-er

4th Drawer No. of sheets of paperfed from the 4th Draw-er

2nd Drawer No. of sheets of paperfed from the 2nd Draw-er

5th Drawer No. of sheets of paperfed from the 5th Draw-er

<Port/Option 2/3>


ADFEntrance

No. of sheets of paperfed through the ADFtake-up section.

Sorter No. of sheets of paperfed out of the Sorter

ADF Reverse No. of originals fedthrough the turnoverunit of the ADF

Staple No. of stapling se-quences performed

DUP No. of sheets of paperfed from the DuplexUnit

Punch No. of punching se-quences performed


S-30



Port/option <Port/Option 3/3>

Display Description

PC Drum No. of revolutions of the PC Drum, as converted to the numberof sheets of A4 crosswise paper fed through the copier

Developer No. of sheets of paper fed through

Fusing Roller No. of revolutions of the Fusing Roller, as converted to the num-ber of sheets of A4 crosswise paper fed through the copier

<Clearing a Count>Using the or key, highlight the count to be cleared, then pressthe Clear key.Note: If a count is accidentally cleared, pressing the Interrupt key will

undo the clear operation.

LCT No. of sheets of paper fed through the LCT


S-31



Consumables Enter the count of the Copy Kit counter. When the count, which is increasedby 1 each time a copy is made, reaches the set count, the maintenance callreminder message, together with maintenance code “M4,” is displayed.Note: Whether the maintenance call reminder message is given or not de-

pends on the setting made for “Copy Kit Counter” of “Tech. Rep.Choice.”

Toner collectEnter the count of the Toner Collect counter. When the count, which increasesby 1 each time a copy is made, reaches the set count, the maintenance code“M2” is displayed. After wards, the machine stops operating after 10k copiesare made and the maintenance call reminder message is displayed.

Note: The set count should be no more than 200k for U.S.A. areas, 180k forEuropean areas.

<Setting a Count>1. Using the or key, select the counter to be set.2. Enter the value from the 10-Key Pad.<Clearing the Set Value/Count>Using the or key, highlight the count to be cleared, then press the Clearkey.Note: If a count is accidentally cleared, pressing the Interrupt key will undo the

clear operation.<Resetting the Counter>

Using the / key, select the counter corresponding to the displayed mainte-nance code, then press the clear key.

Auto CPU Reset Shows whether a CPU overrun has occurred in different CPU-mounted boardswhich are monitored by the watchdog function.


MSC/Panel PWB-B ADF Original System Opt.

Master PWB-A Sorter Exit System Opt.

SCP PWB-F DataController

D-102 (PWB-A)

Note: This counter does not count the number of CPU overruns which haveoccurred. “1” indicates that there was a CPU overrun, while “0” indi-cates there was no CPU overrun.

<Clearing the Count>Using the or key, highlight the count to be cleared, then press the Clearkey.Note: If a count is accidentally cleared, pressing the Interrupt key will undo the

clear operation.


S-32

1156SBS050405A

5. I/O Check This function is used to check the sensors and boards when a paper misfeed or malfunction occurs,

thereby locating the fault.

Tech. Rep. Mode I/O Check


IC Port Data Check Shows the states of the I/O ports when the copier is in stand-by. With theoutput ports, the change of the data in the port allows an operation check ofelectrical components to be performed.

NOTEFor details, see TROUBLESHOOTING.

Paper Path SensorsCheck

A sheet of paper is fed through the copier to switch the state of sensors alongthe paper path between 1 and 0, thereby determining whether the sensors areoperational or faulty.<Procedure>1. Select the paper path (paper source, copying mode, etc.) to be checked and

enter this function.2. Press the Start key to start the sensor check sequence.

No. Display Sensor Name

12345678910111213141516171819

1st Feed2nd Feed3rd Feed4th Feed1st Vertical2nd Vertical3rd Vertical4th VerticalTrans. RollerLeading Edge1st Exit2nd ExitTurnover UpTurnover LowDup EntranceDup ExitNon SortSortPunch Regist

1st Drawer Paper Take-up Sensor PC562nd Drawer Paper Take-up Sensor PC573rd Drawer Paper Take-up Sensor PC214th Drawer Paper Take-up Sensor PC291st Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor PC632nd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor PC64Vertical Transport Sensor 3 PC17Vertical Transport Sensor 4 PC22Transport Roller Sensor PC54Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55Paper Exit Sensor S53

Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Sensor 1 PC30Duplex Unit Turnover Path Sensor PC13Duplex Unit Paper Entry Sensor PC14Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Sensor PC16Non-Sort Exit Sensor PC1Sort Exit Sensor PC2Punch Registration Sensor PC10

Note: The sensor detects paper when “0” and no paper when “1”.


S-33

Tech. Rep. Mode I/O Check


Memory Check Touching the Memory Check key causes the copier to automatically check theROM/RAM on MSC Board PWB-B.

Result Display Action

Normal “Memory check completed.Turn the main switch OFF, andthen ON.”

Turn OFF, then ON, thePower Switch.

Faulty

“ROM ERROR” Change PWB-B (IC2B)

“MESSAGEROM ERROR” Change PWB-B (IC2B)

“RAM ERROR” Change PWB-B.

“VRAM ERROR” Change PWB-B.

“LCDTC ERROR” Change PWB-B.

Controller BoardCheck

Touching the Controller Board Check key causes the copier to perform a self-diagnostics of Master Board PWB-A.

Result Display Action

Normal The highlighted “ControllerBoard Check” key is returnedto normal display.

None

Faulty The malfunction code appears. Change PWB-A.

Panel IndicationCheck

Checks the LEDs and Touch Panel on the control panel for correct operation.<Procedure>1. Touch the Panel Indication Check key.2. All LEDs light up and then each LED goes out in the following order. When all

LEDs go out, they all light up again and the above sequence is repeated. (TheLEDs should alternately light up and go out in said manner.)

All ON Mode Checkkey

Interrupt keyEnergy Saverkey

Start key (green)Start key (orange)

3. A checkered pattern appears on the Touch Panel.4. Select an individual grid. The grid should switch from white to black, or vice

versa, when it is selected. If it works that way, the corresponding liquid crystalis considered to be operational.

5. Press the Panel Reset key to complete the procedure.


S-34

1149SBS050406A

6. Last Trouble

Tech. Rep. Mode Last Trouble


Last Trouble Touching the Last Trouble key shows the various copying settings made whenthe last malfunction occurred, thereby providing a basis for determining thecause of the problem.

Item Description

No. of copies settingNo. of copies

Auto Paper, paper sizeCopy paper

Auto Size, zoom ratioZoom ratio

Auto Exposure, Manual Exp. settingImage density

On, offMixed Orig. Detection

1 1, 1 2, 2 2, etc.Orig. copy

Non-Sort, Sort, Group, Sort Staple, PunchFinishing

Cover (Front), Cover (Front & Back), CopiedCover, Non-Copied Cover

Cover

Copied Inserts, Non-Copied InsertsPage Insertion

Copied Interleaves, Non-Copied InterleavesOHP Interleaving

Method, position, widthFile Margin

Method, position, widthErase

1156SBS050407A

7. ROM Version

Tech. Rep. Mode ROM Version


ROM Version Shows the ROM versions of the following boards.

Display Description

PWB-BMSC/Panel IC2B

PWB-AMaster IC2A

PWB-FSCP IC1F

PWB-A of AFR-13, AF-5ADF

PWB-A of S-208, ST-211, S-106,ST-104

Sorter

D-102 boardData Controller IC2


S-35

1149SBS050408A

8. RD Mode

Tech. Rep. Mode RD Mode


RD Mode Make the initial settings of the copier for the Data Terminal.

ID Code Entering a 7-digit ID code from the 10-Key Pad enables making thefollowing settings. When the ID code is entered and transmitted afterthe initial settings have been made, it executes the transmission ofMAINT. START to the Center.

Maintenance Used to make the initial settings and various transmissions.

DT Setting Enter the following data.

CT-ID Enter the 4-digit ID number of the Center which has been programmedin the Center personal computer.

DT-ID Enter the 6-digit ID number of the Data Terminal.

TEL No. Enter the 19-or-less-digit phone number of the modem connected tothe Center personal computer.Note 1: When the office extension and outside line use different sys-

tems, enter “P” for a “pulse” telephone line or “T” for a “tone”telephone line before the outside line number.

Note 2: The time it takes the private branch exchange (PBX) system toswitch from the extension line to the outside line varies de-pending on the type of PBX system used. Set this time asfollows.

Fixed switching time: Enter the pause code “–” (a single “–”lasts 2 sec.).

Varying switching time: Enter the wait code “W.”

Common DT Settings of the following functions.

Dial Mode Select the type of telephone line of the user.

Tone linePulse line

TonePulse

Auto Receive Choose “Yes” or “No” for the auto reception function.

YES NO

Note: Select “Yes” if the line is dedicated to the Data Terminal.

Result Code Set the value according to the type of modem on the copier.Note: Don’t use this function as long as “5” has been set for it.

Report Format Japan only

10 BIT

RAM Clear Reinitializes the Data Terminal.

Maintenance NO


S-36

Tech. Rep. Mode RD Mode

Touch PanelDisplay Setting

RD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data Save/Load Enables transmission of Data Save and Data Load.

Data Save Transmits the command that saves the PPC RAM data to the Center.

Data Load Transmits the command that loads the data sent by Data Save back tothe PPC.

Initial Transmission Used to perform the initial transmission from the PPC to the Center tocheck for correct communication when the Data Terminal has been setup.

Call Completion Used by the Tech. Rep. to notify the Center that his/her service job forthe copier has been completed.

Counter Clear Used to clear the count of the spare counter set by the Center.<Procedure>1. Select the spare counter to be cleared.2. Touch “Call Completion” which transmits a signal to the Center to clear

the count of the specified counter.


S-37

1156SBS050409A

9. Accessory Test This function is used to make an operation check and adjustments to the ADF and Sorter or Staple Sort-

er.

Tech. Rep. Mode Accessory Test


ADF Check Enables the operation check and adjustments to be performed for thedocument feeder.

Paper Passage & InputCheck

Makes a paper passage test in each operating mode of the ADF andchecks the sensors along the paper path for operation.

2in1 2-SidedStep Feed

SADFNormal

Empty SensorADF Entrance SensorRegister SensorExit SensorAuto Feeder Empty Sensor

Width Sensor AWidth Sensor BWidth Sensor CExit Drawer SensorOrig. Guide Home Sensor

Note: “1” – paper present; “0” – paper not present<Procedure>1. Select the operating mode to be checked and touch “Next.”2. Load the required number of originals into the Document Feed Tray

and press the Start key.

Output Check Checks each of the motors and solenoids for operation.

M1 M2 M3 M4 M5

SL1 SL2 SL3 SL4 CL

<Procedure> Select the part to be checked and press the Start key.

Doc. Stop Position Set Adjusts the document stop position in different operating modes of theADF.

Setting 43 50 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-Sided2-Sided2 in 1

2in1 Space in between origs.Auto FeederRegist Loop

StopPosition –7mm 0mm +8mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Note: A greater setting value (+ direction) moves away from the Origi-nal Width Scale. (In “2in1 Space between origs.,” it is for greaterdistance between the documents.)

<Procedure>1. Select the operating mode to be checked and load the required number

of originals into the Document Feed Tray.2. Press the Start key. When the original is taken up and then stopped,

raise the ADF and adjust the stop position using the or key; then,feed the original once again for a recheck.


S-38

Tech. Rep. Mode Accessory Test


Sorter Check Enables the following operation checks to be performed for the Sorter.

Transport Motor Pressing the Start key energizes the Transport Motor to turn the variousTransport Rollers.Note: The 10-Bin Sorter is not operated.

Bin Movement Pressing the Start key energizes the Bin Moving Motor to move the binsup and down.

Stapling Pressing the Start key runs a stapling sequence if paper is loaded in the1st Bin. If no paper is loaded, only a paper clamp motion occurs.

Paper Aligning Pressing the Start key causes a paper aligning motion to occur for thewidth of the paper currently selected for use.

Stack move Pressing the Start key begins a sequence in which paper is stacked inorder starting with the paper loaded in the 1st Bin.

When “Next” is touched after any of the Sorter Check functions has beenselected, the “Input Check” screen appears. When that particular checkoperation is then run with this screen on the Touch Panel, either 1 or 0 isshown after each sensor according to its state.

Paper Aligning Bar HomeBin EmptyPaper Clamp PositionPaper Clamp HomeStaple Paper Detect

Stapler HomeBin Home PositionStaple unit FD moveStaple Unit CD Constant PositionGate Unit constant PositionSort path constant Position


S-39

1156SBS050410A

10. Level History This function is used to show and set the various level histories which were changed according to the

operating conditions of the copier and user requirements.

Tech. Rep. Mode Level History


Level History Touching the Level History key will show the various level histories as detailedbelow. Of all data displayed, only that for “ATDC Ref. Value” and “FuserTemp. Control” can be changed.

– ATDC Ref. Value – Change this data when the RAM Board has been changed or a Developing

Unit from another copier has been installed.

– Fuser Temp. Control – Change this data if fusing performance becomes poor due to the operating

environment and the paper being used.

<Level History 1/2>

Display Variable RangeIncre-ments

Description

ATDC Ref. ValueATDC Target LevelATDC Current Level

2 step0.5 (%)0.5 (%)

F8 adjusted valueTarget ATDC levelCurrent ATDC level

2 to 2541.0 to 9.0 (%)1.0 to 9.0 (%)

Vg Default LevelVg Current Level

30 (V)30 (V)

Initial grid voltagesettingGrid voltage correc-tion value due tochanges with time

400 to 850 (V)400 to 850 (V)

<Level History 2/2>

Display Variable RangeIncre-ments

Description

Fuser Temp. Control

Fuser Temp. Current

10 (°C)

10 (°C)

Target fusing tem-peratureCurrent fusing tem-perature

180 to 200 (°C)

160 to 220 (°C)

Expo. Default Level

Expo. Current Level

1 (V)

1 (V)

Initial ExposureLamp level settingExposure Lamp lev-el correction valuedue to changes withtime

49 to 71 (V)

49 to 71 (V)

Toner ReplenishingTime

10 steps Cumulative time oftoner replenishing

0 to 1270 (mm)


S-40

1156SBS050411A

11. Machine Status This function shows the codes of isolated malfunctions which are currently present. This screen is also

accessible by touching the wrench mark shown at the bottom left corner of the Basic screen under nor-mal operating conditions.

Tech. Rep. Mode Machine Status


Machine Status Of the malfunction codes listed below, those that have occurred are dis-played, together with the functions that are disabled by these malfunctions.Up to five isolated malfunctions are shown. When a sixth isolated malfunctionoccurs, the copier considers it as an ordinary malfunction. Even if there areless than five isolated malfunctions, if there are isolated malfunctions occur-ring at all paper sources, the next isolated malfunction will be regarded as anordinary one.

Malfunction Code Description

C09XX Paper take-up failure

C0dXX Duplex Unit malfunction

C0350 to 52 SP communication failure

C0F2X Faulty AIDC Sensor

C0FEX to FX Faulty Original Size DetectingSensor

C004d/45 Cooling Fan Motor malfunc-tion (Ventilation/Fusing Section)

C0b3X / 5X to 7X Sorter malfunction

C0F7X Faulty Paper Empty Sensor

<Clearing Procedure>With the Machine Status screen on the Touch Panel, swing open and close theFront Door to clear all the isolated malfunctions.

1149SBS050412A

12. Admin. Mode This function is used to enter or change the administrator number, in addition to the functions set in the

“Administrator Mode” available from User’s Choice.

Tech. Rep. Mode Admin. Mode


Copy Track

Copy Track Data

Max. Copy SetsSee “Administrator Mode” of User’s Choice.

User Help

Administrator #Input

From the 10-Key Pad, enter a 4-digit number (0000 to 9999) that serves as anID number for opening the “Admin. Mode” of User’s Choice.


S-41

1149SBS0600A

FACTORY SETTING6 Factory Setting is used to make adjustments at the factory.

1149SBS0601A

6-1. Factory Setting Menu Screen

1149O424CA

1149SBS0602A

6-2. Factory Setting Function Setting Procedure<Setting Procedure>

1. Set the copier into the Tech. Rep. mode by pressing the following keys in this order.

Stop key 0 Stop key 1

2. Enter the Factory Setting mode by pressing the following keys in this order.

Stop key Start key

3. Select the particular Factory Setting function to be set.4. Make the necessary settings by following the instructions given sequentially on the screen.NOTE: The function selected is highlighted.

<Exiting the Mode> Press the Panel Reset key on the control panel.


S-42

1156SBS0603A

6-3. Factory Setting Function Tree

FactorySetting

Adjust

Function

MarketingArea

A0 Lens FocusA1 Lens Full Size PositionA2 Mirror Full Size PositionA3 Feed Direction Mag. RatioA4 Scan Regist Full SizeA5 Scan Regist Reduction

Adjust 1/2

A6 Book B-Scan RegistA11 Scan Regist EnlargementA12 Leading Edge Erase AdjustA13 Trailing Edge Erase Adjust

Adjust 1/2

* See “Tech. Rep. Mode” for functions other thanF2, F4, F6, F8, and FF.

* See “Tech. Rep. Mode.”

F1 Paper PassageF3 Exp. LampF5 Optimum & AEF7 Orig. SensorDeveloper

Paper Path SensorsF2 Drum/TransF4 HV SeparatorF6 Edit Ref. AdjF8 ATDC AdjustFF F8+F5

1156SBS060301A

1. Function

Factory Setting Function


F2 Drum/Trans Checks the PC Drum Charge Corona and Image Transfer Corona for output.

Note: For factory adjustment only.

F4 HV Separator Checks the Paper Separator Corona for output.

Note: For factory adjustment only.

F6 Edit Ref. Adj Pressing the Start key turns ON and OFF the Image Erase Lamp to make acheckered pattern on the paper for checking the lamp for correct operationand adjusting its position.


S-43

– Components Energized in “Function” –

Component F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 FF

Main Drive Motor

Fan Motors

Toner Replenishing Motor

Paper take-up

Scan

Exposure Lamp

Main Erase Lamp

Image Erase Lamp

Synchronizing Rollers

PC Drum Paper SeparatorFingers

PC Drum Charge Coronaand Image Transfer Corona

Paper Separator Corona anddeveloping bias

Misfeed detection

Malfunction detection

: Energized : Remains deenergized


S-44

1156SBS060302A

2. Adjust This function is used to adjust the optical system before shipment from the factory and must not be run

except when the RAM Board has been replaced with a new one or memory cleared. Further, when theRAM Board has been changed or memory cleared, enter the factory settings indicated on the AdjustMode label affixed to the inside of the Front Door.

Factory Setting Adjust


A0 Lens Focus Corrects the focal length of the Lens. (Match the grouping of the Lens beingused.)

Setting 49 50 51

DescriptionShort focal lengthadjustment Standard

Long focallength adjust-ment

A1 Lens Full SizePosition

Adjusts the zoom ratio in the crosswise direction by varying the Lens fullsize position.

Setting 43 50 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Description Reductiondirection

Enlargementdirection

A2 Mirror FullSize Position

Corrects the optical path length of the Mirror with respect to the Lens focallength.

Setting 43 50 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Description Reductiondirection

Enlargementdirection

A3 Feed DirectionMag. Ratio

Adjusts the zoom ratio in the feeding direction by varying the scan speed.

Setting 46 50 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Description–1.6% (Reduc-tion direction)

+1.6% (Enlarge-ment direction)

0%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A4 Scan RegistFull Size

Corrects the amount of offset along the leading edge in the full size modeby varying the Synchronizing Roller start timing.

Setting 40 50 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Description–5.0mm(Smaller)

+5.0mm(Greater)

0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


S-45

Factory Setting Adjust


A5 Scan RegistReduction

Corrects the amount of offset along the leading edge in a reduction modeby varying the Synchronizing Roller start timing.

Setting 40 50 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


+5.0mm(Greater)

0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A6 Book B-ScanRegist

Corrects registration in Book B-Scan by varying the Synchronizing Rollerstart timing.

Setting 45 50 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


+2.5mm(Greater)

0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A11 Scan RegistEnlargement

Corrects the amount of offset along the leading edge in an enlargementmode by varying the Synchronizing Roller start timing.

Setting 40 50 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


+5.0mm(Greater)

0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A12 Leading EdgeErase Adjust

Corrects the width of void image along the leading edge of the image byvarying the Image Erase Lamp ON timing.

Setting 45 50 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Description–5mm

(Smaller)+5mm(Greater)

0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A13 Trailing EdgeErase Adjust

Corrects the width of void image along the trailing edge of the image byvarying the Image Erase Lamp ON timing.

Setting 42 50 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Description–8mm

(Smaller)+8mm(Greater)

0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Printed in Japan


1156-7997-11 97046000

1156SBS000EA

Interleaf EP5000/EP4000 TROUBLESHOOTING97.04.01

1156SBT000AA


i

1156SBT000BA

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION1

1-1. General Precautions T-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2. How to Use This Book T-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3. Reading the Text T-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/O PORT CHECK2

2-1. Controlled Parts Check Procedure T-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2. I/O Port Check List T-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE3

3-1. Paper Misfeed T-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2. Misfeed Detection Types and Detection Timings T-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3. Misfeed Clearing Procedures T-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1) Copier Paper Take-Up Misfeed T-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2) Transport/Separator Misfeed T-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3) Multi Bypass Misfeed T-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4) Fusing/Exit misfeed T-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5) PF-205 Paper Take-Up Misfeed T-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6) PF-105 Paper Take-Up Misfeed T-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7) AD-9 Vertical Transport/Storage Misfeed T-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8) AD-9 Paper Take-Up Misfeed T-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MALFUNCTIONS4

4-1. Detection Timings Classified by Malfunction Codes T-43. . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2. Troubleshooting Procedures T-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1) C0000: Main Drive Motor M1’s Failure to Turn T-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C0001: Main Drive Motor M1 Turning at Abnormal Timing

2) C0040: Suction Fan Motor M4’s Failure to Turn T-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3) C0046: Fusing Section Cooling Fan Motor M15’s

Failure to Turn T-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C0047: Fusing Section Cooling Fan Motor M15 Turning at

Abnormal Timing


ii

4) C004A: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5’s Failure to Turn T-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C004b: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 Turning at Abnormal Timing

C004C: Ventilation Fan Motor M3’s Failure to TurnC004d: Ventilation Fan Motor M3 Turning at Abnormal Timing

5) C0070: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8’s Failure to Turn T-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C0071: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 Turning at Abnormal Timing

C0072: Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9’s Failure to Turn

6) C0200 Corona Malfunctions T-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7) C03##: Master Board/Harness Malfunctions T-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8) C0400: Exposure Lamp LA1’s Failure to Turn ON T-69. . . . . . . . . . . .

C0410: Exposure Lamp LA1 Turning ON at Abnormal Timing9) C0500: Warming-up Failure T-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C0510: Abnormally Low Fusing TemperatureC0520: Abnormally High Fusing Temperature

10)C0600: Scanner Motor M2 Malfunction T-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C06FX: Signal Failure

11) C0610: Lens Motor M6 Malfunction T-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C0620: Mirror Motor M7 malfunction

12)C0910: 2nd Drawer Upward Motion Failure T-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C0914: 2nd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M14’s Failure to TurnC0920: 1st Drawer Upward Motion FailureC0924: 1st Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M13’s Failure to Turn

13)C0900: 3rd Drawer Upward Motion Failure T-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C0904: 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M24’s Failure to TurnC0950: 4th Drawer Upward Motion FailureC0954: 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M25’s Failure to Turn

14)C0911: 2nd Drawer Upward Motion Failure (Inch Areas) T-81. . . . . . . C0912: 2nd Drawer Downward Motion FailureC0913: 2nd Drawer Upward Motion FailureC0916: 2nd Drawer Ejection Failure

15)C0921: 1st Drawer Upward Motion Failure (Inch Areas) T-83. . . . . . . C0922: 1st Drawer Downward Motion FailureC0923: 1st Drawer Upward Motion FailureC0926: 1st Drawer Ejection Failure

16)C0901: 3rd Drawer Upward Motion Failure (Inch Areas) T-85. . . . . . . C0902: 3rd Drawer Downward Motion FailureC0903: 3rd Drawer Upward Motion FailureC0906: 3rd Drawer Ejection Failure

17)C0951: 4th Drawer Upward Motion Failure (Inch Areas) T-87. . . . . . .


iii

C0952: 4th Drawer Downward Motion FailureC0953: 4th Drawer Upward Motion FailureC0956: 4th Drawer Ejection Failure

18)C0990: Main Tray Upward Motion Failure T-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C0991: Main Tray Downward Motion FailureC0992: Main Tray Downward Motion FailureC0993: Main Tray Upward Motion FailureC0994: Elevator Motor M26’s Failure to Turn

19)C0998: Shifter Transfer Failure T-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C0999: Shifter Return FailureC099A: Shifter Return FailureC099b: Shifter Transfer FailureC099C: Shift Motor M27’s Failure to Turn

20)C099E: Shift Gate Position Detecting Failure T-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C099F: Shift Gate Position Detecting FailureC0996: 3rd Drawer Lock Release FailureC0F79: Paper Empty Sensor Failure

21)C0d00: Duplex Unit Front/Rear Edge Guide PlateHome Position Detection Failure T-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C0d20: Duplex Unit Gate Unit Home Position Detection FailureC0d50: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31’s Failure to TurnC0d51: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 Turning at Abnormal Timing

22)C0E00: Main Erase Lamp LA2’s Failure to Turn ON T-97. . . . . . . . . . . C0E01: Main Erase Lamp LA2 Turning ON at Abnormal Timing

23)C0E20: Image Erase Lamp LA3’s Failure to Turn ON T-98. . . . . . . . . 24)C0F02: Original Size Detecting Board UN2 Malfunction T-99. . . . . . . 25)C0F10: AE Sensor Board PWB-H Malfunction T-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26)C0F20: AIDC Sensor Board PWB-G Variation

Correction Failure T-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C0F22: AIDC Sensor Board PWB-G Grid Voltage (Vg) Correction

FailureC0F23: AIDC Sensor Board PWB-G Exposure Correction Failure

27)C0F30: ATDC Sensor UN3 Failure T-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C0F31: ATDC Sensor UN3 Failure

4-3. Power Malfunctions T-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1) Main Relay Does Not Turn ON. T-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2) Main Relay Turns ON But the Control Panel

Gives No Display T-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-4. Miscellaneous T-107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IMAGE FAILURE5

5-1. Image Failure Troubleshooting T-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


iv

5-2. Initial Checks T-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3. Troubleshooting Procedures Classified by Image Failure T-110. . . . . . .


T-1

1139SBT0100A

INTRODUCTION11139SBT0101A

1-1. General Precautions

1. When servicing the copier with its covers removed, use utmost care to prevent your hands, clothing, andtools from being caught in revolving parts including the chains and gears. When servicing the copier withthe Lower Rear Cover removed, be sure to install the jig.

2. Before attempting to replace parts and unplug connectors, make sure that the power cord of the copierhas been unplugged from the wall outlet.

3. Never create a closed circuit across connector pins except those specified in the text and on the printedcircuit.

4. When creating a closed circuit and measuring a voltage across connector pins specified in the text, besure to use the green wire (GND).

5. When the user is using a word processor or personal computer from a wall outlet of the same line, takenecessary steps to prevent the circuit breaker from opening due to overloads.

6. Keep all disassembled parts in good order and keep tools under control so that none will be lost or dam-aged.

1139SBT0102A

1-2. How to Use This Book

1. If a component on a PWB or any other functional unit including a motor is defective, the text only instructsyou to replace the whole PWB or functional unit and does not give troubleshooting procedures applicablewithin the defective unit.

2. All troubleshooting procedures contained herein assume that there are no breaks in the harnesses andcords and all connectors are plugged into the right positions.

3. For the removal procedures of covers and parts, see DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT.

4. The troubleshooting procedures are given in the order of greater frequency of trouble or order of opera-tion.

5. The procedures preclude possible malfunctions due to noise and other external causes.

1139SBT0103A

1-3. Reading the Text

1. The paper transport failure troubleshooting procedures are given according to the symptom. First identifythe location where the paper is present and start the procedure for that particular location. For malfunctiontroubleshooting, start with step 1 and onward.

2. Make checks in numerical order of steps and, if an item is checked okay, go to the next step.

↑

↑

Check ItemStep Result Action

1

2

Is...? YES Do this.

Go to step 2 if you answered NO.

Pattern 1 Pattern 2

Check ItemStep Result Action

1

2

Is...? YES Do this.

NO Check that.

Go to step 2 if it checks okay.


T-2

1151SBT0200A

I/O PORT CHECK21156SBT0201A

2-1. Controlled Parts Check Procedure

To allow the Tech. Rep. to easily and safely determine whether a particular controlled part is fully opera-tional, this copier provides the following provision: checking the data of the I/O port of the board IC withthe copier in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition) allows theTech. Rep. to determine whether a signal is properly input to, and output from, a controlled part.

<Procedure>

1) On the circuit diagram accompanying the text, locate the I/O port of the controlled part which is probablydefective when a misfeed or malfunction occurs.

2) Select the “IC Port Data Check” function of “I/O Check” in the Tech. Rep. mode and access the screenwhich contains the port identified in step 1 above. (See SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. MODE.)

3) Change or check the input or output port data to determine whether the controlled part is operationaland signals are properly input and output.

4) If the controlled part does not operate properly after changing the output port data, select “ControllerBoard Check” of “I/O Check” in the Tech. Rep. mode and determine whether the board is responsiblefor that malfunction or not.

Note: Only the output ports given on pages T-37 and 38 may be checked by “Controller Board Check”of “I/O Check” in the Tech. Rep. mode.


T-3

<Controlled Part Check Procedure by Changing Input Port Data>

Example: When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper take-up section of the copier, 1st Drawer Pa-per Take-Up Sensor PC56 is considered to be responsible for it.

<Procedure>

1) Remove the sheet of paper misfed and reset the misfeed.

2) From the I/O port check list, it is found that the H/L input signal to PC56 is supplied from PWB-A(IC3A) APB3.

3) Select “IC Port Check” from the I/O Check function in the Tech. Rep. mode and access thescreen which includes the input ports of PWB-A (IC3A) APB3.

4) Check that the input port data of PWB-A (IC3A) APB3 on the screen is “H” (sensor being un-blocked).

5) Move the PC56 actuator to block the sensor.

6) Return to the “I/O Check” basic screen once, select “IC Port Check” again, choose the screenwhich includes the APB3 input port data, and make sure that the data has changed from “H”to “L”.

L: PC56 is operational. H: PC56 is faulty.


T-4

<Controlled Part Check Procedure by Changing Output Port Data>

Example: When a manual paper misfeed occurs, Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3 is con-sidered to be responsible for it.

<Procedure>

1) Remove the sheet of paper misfed and reset the misfeed.

2) From the I/O port check list, it is found that the ON/OFF output signal of CL3 is supplied fromPWB-A (IC5A) BPA1.

3) Select “IC Port Check” from the I/O Check function in the Tech. Rep. mode and access thescreen which includes the output ports of PWB-A (IC5A) BPA1.

4) Check that the output port data of PWB-A (IC5A) BPA1 on the screen is “1” (CL3 is deener-gized).

5) Touch the “CHANGE” key on the screen to change the data from “1” to “0”, causing CL3 to beenergized for approx. 5 seconds. This allows you to determine whether the Clutch is “operation-al or faulty” by checking for the Clutch sound.

Operational: Sound produced. Faulty: No sound produced.

6) If CL3 was not energized, make the “Controller Board Check” in the same mode (for some elec-trical parts only).

7) If the “ON” signal of CL51 is not output from PWB-A, the corresponding malfunction code isdisplayed.

* For CL3, “C0337” is displayed.


T-5

1156SBT0202A

2-2. I/O Port Check List<Port Check Screens>

The following screens are displayed in the standby mode but may not always be as shown belowbecause some port data are undefined. (Copier+PF-205)

1156T021CA1156T017CA

1156T018CA

1156T019CA

1156T020CA

1156T023CA

1156T022CA

1156T016CA


T-6

<I/O Port Check List>Copier *The shaded areas of the following table indicate that the output check cannot be made by

touching the Change key.

Sym-bol

Parts/Signal NameDis-play IC

No.PortNo.

I/O

Operation Char-acteristics/Panel

DisplayCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0

M1 Main Drive Motor/REM 2/8 IC4A BPA2 OFF ON PJ18A-9

↑Main Drive Motor/locksignal

2/8 IC4A BPB1 Whenlocked

Whenturned

PJ18A-10

M2 Scanner Motor/SCAN 3/8 IC4A APC0 StopScancycle

PJ8A-5

M3Ventilation Fan Motor/REM

3/8 IC4A BPC1 OFF ON PJ34A-1

↑Ventilation Fan Motor/lock signal


Whenturned

PJ34A-3

M4Suction Fan Motor/se-lect signal

3/8 IC4A BPC2

Turnedat highspeed

Turnedat lowspeed

PJ15A-4

↑Suction Fan Motor/locksignal

3/8 IC4A BPC7 Whenlocked

Whenturned

PJ15A-3

M5Original Glass CoolingFan Motor/REM


↑Original Glass CoolingFan Motor/lock signal


Whenturned

PJ15A-7

M8Main Hopper Toner Re-plenishing Motor/REM

3/8 IC4A BPC3 OFF ON PJ11A-4A

M9Sub Hopper Toner Re-plenishing Motor/REM

3/8 IC5A APA2 OFF ON PJ11A-2A

M111st Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor

3/8 IC5A APA0 Turn in-hibited

Turnper-

mittedPJ18A-1

M122nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor

3/8 IC5A APA1 Turn in-hibited

Turnper-

mittedPJ18A-2

M131st Drawer Paper Lift-UpMotor (UP)

3/8 IC5A APA4 OFF ON (up) PJ18A-5

↑1st Drawer Paper Lift-UpMotor (DOWN)

3/8 IC5A APA5 OFFON

(down)PJ18A-6

M142nd Drawer PaperLift-Up Motor (UP)

3/8 IC5A APA6 OFF ON (up) PJ8A-7

↑2nd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor (DOWN)

3/8 IC5A APA7 OFFON

(down)PJ18A-8

M15Fusing Section CoolingFan Motor/REM

3/8 IC4A APC2 OFF ON PJ10A-1


T-7

Symbol Parts/Signal NameDis-play IC

No.PortNo.

I/O


DisplayCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0

↑Fusing Section Cool-ing Fan Motor/locksignal

3/8 IC4A APB6 Whenlocked

Whenturned

PJ10A-3

SL1 Separator Solenoid 2/8 IC4A BPA0 OFF ON PJ11A-6A

SL5Exit/Duplex SwitchingSolenoid

2/8 IC4A BPA5 OFF ON PJ14A-6

SL51Manual Feed PaperTake-Up Solenoid(UP)

3/8 IC5A BPA2 OFFON(up)

PJ15A-10

↑Manual Feed PaperTake-Up Solenoid(DOWN)

3/8 IC5A BPA3 OFFON

(down)PJ15A-9

CL1Paper TransportClutch


CL2Synchronizing RollerClutch


CL3Manual Feed PaperTake-Up Clutch


PC12Duplex Unit VerticalTransport Sensor

3/8 IC5A BPB0 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ17A-8

PC35Toner Bottle HomePosition Sensor

3/8 IC4A BPC5 Un-

blockedBlocked PJ11A-9

PC51Manual Feed PaperEmpty Sensor

3/8 IC5A BPB1 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ15A-14

PC54Transport Roller Sen-sor

3/8 IC5A BPB6 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ19A-5

PC55Paper Leading EdgeDetecting Sensor

3/8 IC5A BPB5 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ19A-2

PC561st Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor

1/8 IC3A APB3 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ21A-5A

PC572nd Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor

1/8 IC3A APB4 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ21A-5B

PC611st Drawer Set Sen-sor

1/8 IC3A BPA5 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ22A-2

PC622nd Drawer Set Sen-sor

1/8 IC3A APB5 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ22A-6


T-8

Sym-bol


No.PortNo.

I/O

Operation Charac-teristics/Panel Dis-

playCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0

PC631st Drawer VerticalTransport Sensor

1/8 IC3A APB6 Papernot

present

Paperpresent

PJ21A-8A

PC642nd Drawer VerticalTransport Sensor

1/8 IC3A APB7 Papernot

present

Paperpresent

PJ21A-8B

PC651st Drawer Lift-UpSensor

1/8 IC3A APB1 Not atupperlimit

At up-per limit

PJ21A-2A

PC662nd Drawer Lift-UpSensor

1/8 IC3A APB2 Not atupperlimit

At up-per limit

PJ21A-2B

PC671st Drawer Lift-UpMotor Pulse Sensor

1/8 IC3A APC0 Un-

blocked Blocked PJ23A-2

PC682nd Drawer Lift-UpMotor Pulse Sensor

1/8 IC3A APC1 Un-

blocked Blocked PJ23A-5

PC691st Drawer LowerLimit Position Sen-sor

1/8 IC3A BPA2 Not atlowerlimit

At lowerlimit

PJ24A-5

PC702nd Drawer LowerLimit Position Sen-sor

1/8 IC3A BPA3 Not atlowerlimit

At lowerlimit

PJ24A-6

PC72Paper Size Detect-ing Sensor 5

2/8 IC3A BPB6 Size notdetected

Size de-tected

PJ25A-2

PC73Paper Size Detect-ing Sensor 6

2/8 IC3A BPB7 Size notdetected

Size de-tected

PJ25A-5

PC81Scanner ReferencePosition Sensor

2/8 IC4A APC4 Not athome

At home PJ8A-4

PC1011st Drawer PaperEmpty Sensor

1/8 IC3A APC2 Papernot

present

Paperpresent

PJ23A-9

PC1022nd Drawer PaperEmpty Sensor

1/8 IC3A APC3 Papernot

present

Paperpresent

PJ23A-12

PC111Original Cover Detecting Sensor

2/8 IC4A APB5 Raised Lowered PJ12A-1

PC112Toner Hopper HomePosition Sensor

3/8 IC5A BPB7 Not athome

At home PJ11A-9B

CNT1 Total Counter/REM 1/8 IC1A P55 NormallyWhen

countingPJ13A-6

↑ Total Counter/Set 2/8 IC4A APB7 Out of

positionIn posi-

tion–


T-9

Sym-bol


No.PortNo.

I/O


playCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0

CNT2 Plug-In Counter/REM 1/8 IC1A P44 NormallyWhencount-

ingPJ28A-9

↑ Plug-In Counter/Set 3/8 IC5A BPC3 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ28A-7

H1 Fusing Heater Lamp 1/8 IC1A P57 OFF ON PJ33A-2

H3Paper DehumidifyingHeater

1/8 IC1A P45 ON OFF PJ4A-5

RY1 Main Relay 1/8 IC1A P46 ON OFF PJ4A-3

LA1Exposure Lamp/AVRREM

1/8 IC1A P61 OFF ON PJ8A-13

LA2Main Erase Lamp/REM


LA2Main Erase Lamp/failure detection


S1 Power Switch 1/8 IC1A P53 OFF ON PJ4A-1

S21Front Door InterlockSwitch

1/8 IC1A P51 OFF ON PJ4A-4

S22Right Upper Door Interlock Switch

3/8 IC5A BPB2 OFF ON PJ16A-2

S23Left Upper Door Interlock Switch


S53 Paper Exit Switch 3/8 IC4A BPB2 Paper

present

Papernot

presentPJ20A-12

S61Paper Size DetectingSwitch 1

1/8 IC3A BPA6 Size yetto be de-

tected

Size de-tected

PJ26A-2


1/8 IC3A BPA7 Size yetto be de-

tected

Size de-tected

PJ26A-4


2/8 IC3A BPB4 Size yetto be de-

tected

Size de-tected

PJ26A-7


2/8 IC3A BPB5 Size yetto be de-

tected

Size de-tected

PJ26A-9

S106Toner Empty Detecting Switch

3/8 IC1A BPC6 Toner

still avail-able

Tonerempty

PJ11A-8B


T-10

Sym-bol


No.PortNo.

I/O


playCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0

UN51st Drawer PaperDescent Key


↑Manual Down Display 1


UN62nd Drawer PaperDescent Key


↑Manual Down Display 2


PWB-GAIDC Sensor Board/AIDC REM

2/8 IC4A APA4 OFF ON –


T-11

PF-205


No.PortNo.

I/O


DisplayCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0

M21Vertical TransportDrive Motor

4/8 IC1A PB3 Turn in-hibited

Turnper-

mitted

PJ12A-1~4

M223rd Drawer PaperTake-Up Motor


Turnper-

mitted

PJ11A-1~4

M234th Drawer PaperTake-Up Motor


Turnper-

mitted

PJ10A-1~4

M243rd Drawer PaperLift-Up Motor

4/8 IC1A PA0 – ON (up) PJ9A-8B

↑3rd Drawer PaperLift-Up Motor

4/8 IC1A PA1 OFFON

(down)PJ9A-7B

M254th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor

4/8 IC1A PA2 – ON (up) PJ9A-2A

↑4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor

4/8 IC1A PA3 OFFON

(down)PJ9A-1A

PC11Lower Left Door Sensor

4/8 IC2A PB1 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ3A-2

PC13Duplex Unit TurnoverPath Sensor

4/8 IC2A PB0 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ3A-5

PC17Vertical TransportSensor 3

4/8 IC1A PC3 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ7A-5

PC18Lower Right DoorSensor

4/8 IC1A PE2 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ7A-2

PC193rd Drawer PaperLift-Up Sensor

4/8 IC1A PG3 Not atupperlimit

At up-per limit

PJ6A-12

PC203rd Drawer PaperEmpty Sensor

4/8 IC1A PC0 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ6A-2

PC213rd Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor

4/8 IC1A PE3 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ6A-9


4/8 IC1A PC2 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ6A-5

PC234th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor

4/8 IC1A PF3 Not atupperlimit

At up-per limit

PJ8A-8


T-12


No.PortNo.

I/O


DisplayCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0

PC244th Drawer PaperEmpty Sensor

4/8 IC1A PD0 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ8A-2

PC253rd Drawer Set Sensor

4/8 IC1A PG2 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ9A-2B

PC264th Drawer Set Sensor

4/8 IC1A PF2 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ9A-7A

PC273rd Drawer PaperLift-Up Motor PulseSensor

4/8 IC1A PC1 Un-

blocked

BlockedPJ9A-5B

PC284th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor

4/8 IC1A PD1 Un-

blocked

BlockedPJ9A-4A

PC294th Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor

4/8 IC2A PB3 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ8A-5

PC31Large Capacity TonerCollecting Box SetSensor

4/8 IC2A PC3 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ2A-2


T-13

PF-105

Sym-bol


No.PortNo.

I/O


DisplayCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0



Turnper-

mittedPJ12A-1~4



Turnper-

mittedPJ11A-1~4

M26Main Tray ElevatorMotor

5/8 IC1A PA2 Up/stop Down PJ4A-6B

↑Main Tray ElevatorMotor

5/8 IC1A PA3 Down/stop

Up PJ4A-7B

M27 Paper Shift Motor 5/8 IC1A PA0 Trans-fer/stop

Return PJ4A-4B

↑ Paper Shift Motor 5/8 IC1A PA1 Return/

stopTransfer PJ4A-5B

M28 Shift Gate Motor 5/8 IC1A PB2 OFF ON PJ4A-2B

PC1Shift Tray PaperEmpty Sensor

5/8 IC1A PD1 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ4A-4A

PC2Main Tray LowerPosition Sensor

6/8 IC2A PC1 Not atlowerlimit

Atlowerlimit

PJ4A-9A

PC3Shifter Home Position Sensor

6/8 IC2A PC0 Not athome

At home PJ4A-8A

PC4Shifter Return Position Sensor

6/8 IC2A PD1 Not at

returnedposition

Atreturnedposition

PJ4A-7A

PC5Elevator MotorPulse Sensor

5/8 IC1A PF2 Un-

blocked

BlockedPJ4A-5A

PC6Shift Motor PulseSensor

5/8 IC1A PD0 Un-

blocked

BlockedPJ4A-3A


6/8 IC1A PG2 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ5A-2

PC11Lower Left DoorSensor

6/8 IC2A PB1 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ3A-2

PC13Duplex Unit Turn-over Path Sensor

6/8 IC2A PB0 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ3A-5


5/8 IC1A PC3 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ7A-5


5/8 IC1A PE2 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ7A-2


T-14

Sym-bol


No.PortNo.

I/O


DisplayCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0



Atupperlimit

PJ6A-12

PC203rd Drawer PaperEmpty Sensor

5/8 IC1A PC0 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ6A-2


5/8 IC1A PE3 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ6A-9


5/8 IC1A PC2 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ6A-5

PC31Large Capacity Toner Collecting BoxSet Sensor

4/8 IC2A PC3 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ2A-2

PC34Shift Gate PositionSensor

5/8 IC1A PC1 Un-

blocked

BlockedPJ4A-1B

PC35Lower Position Sensor

6/8 IC2A PB3 Not atlowerlimit

At lowerlimit

PJ4A-2A

PWB-EMain Tray PaperEmpty Board

5/8 IC1A PF3 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ4A-6A

UN21Drawer Paper Descent Key

6/8 IC2A PC2 OFF ON PJ4A-10A

SL413rd Drawer Lock Solenoid

6/8 IC2A PA1 OFF ON PJ5A-5


T-15

AD-9


No.PortNo.

I/O


DisplayCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0

M31Duplex Unit Drive Motor

7/8 IC1G PB3 OFF ON PJ6G-2

↑Duplex Unit Drive Motor/lock signal

7/8 IC1G PE1 Whenlocked

Whenturned

PJ6G-1

CL31Duplex Unit PaperTake-Up Clutch

7/8 IC1G PA3 OFF ON PJ2G-7

SL31Duplex Unit GateSwitching Solenoid

7/8 IC1G PH1 OFF ON PJ3G-5

SL32Duplex Unit Rear Finger Solenoid


SL33Duplex Unit Pick-UpSolenoid


PC8Duplex Gate HomePosition Sensor

7/8 IC1G PE0 Not athome

At home PJ7G-2

PC9Front/Rear EdgeGuide Plate HomePosition Sensor

7/8 IC1G PC3 Not athome

At home PJ7G-5

PC14Duplex Unit PaperEntry Sensor

7/8 IC1G PC1 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ3G-2

PC15Duplex Unit PaperEmpty Sensor

7/8 IC1G PC2 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ2A-4

PC16Duplex Unit PaperTake-Up Sensor

7/8 IC1G PC0 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ2G-9


T-16

C-301


No.PortNo.

I/O


DisplayCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0

HMOT Elevator Motor 8/8 IC1A PH0 Down/stop

Up CN5A-2

↑ Elevator Motor 8/8 IC1A PH1 Up/stop Down CN5A-1

PWB-BPaper Plate DescentSwitch Board

8/8 IC1A PG1 OFF ON CN2A-2

EMP-SEN

Paper Empty Sensor 8/8 IC1A PC1 Paper

present

Papernot

presentCN2A-5

KSEN Paper Feed Sensor 8/8 IC1A PG0 Paper

present

Papernot

presentCN2A-3

LEV-SEN

Paper Plate RaisedPosition Sensor

8/8 IC1A PC0 Not up-per limit

At up-per limit

CN2A-6

LOW-SEN

Paper Plate LoweredPosition Sensor

8/8 IC1A PG3 Not atlowerlimit

At lowerlimit

CN3A-5

DSENCassette Door Sensor

8/8 IC1A PG2 Out of

positionIn posi-

tionCN3A-2

SET-SEN

Set Sensor 8/8 IC1A PC2 Out of

positionIn

positionCN2A-4


T-17

PF205 : MC


No.PortNo.

I/O


DisplayCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0



Turnper-

mitted

PJ12A-1~4



Turnper-

mitted

PJ11A-1~4

M234th Drawer PaperTake-Up Motor


Turnper-

mitted

PJ10A-1~4

M243rd Drawer PaperLift-Up Motor

6/8 IC1A PA0 OFF ON (up) PJ9A-8B

↑3rd Drawer PaperLift-Up Motor

6/8 IC1A PA1 OFF ON (up) PJ9A-7B

M254th Drawer PaperLift-Up Motor

6/8 IC1A PA2 OFF ON (up) PJ9A-2A

↑4th Drawer PaperLift-Up Motor

6/8 IC1A PA3 OFF ON (up) PJ9A-1A

PC11Lower Left DoorSensor

6/8 IC2A PB1 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ3A-2

PC13Duplex Unit Turn-over Path Sensor

6/8 IC2A PB0 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ3A-5


6/8 IC1A PC3 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ7A-5


6/8 IC1A PE2 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ7A-2



Atupperlimit

PJ6A-12


6/8 IC1A PE3 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ6A-9


6/8 IC1A PC2 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ6A-5

PC234th Drawer PaperLift-Up Sensor

6/8 IC1A PF3 Not atupperlimit

Atupperlimit

PJ8A-8


6/8 IC1A PG2 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ9A-2B

PC264th Drawer Set Sensor

6/8 IC1A PF2 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ9A-7A


T-18


No.PortNo.

I/O


DisplayCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0

PC294th Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor

6/8 IC2A PB3 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ8A-5

PC31Large Capacity Ton-er Collecting Box SetSensor

6/8 IC2A PC3 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ2A-2

PC673rd Drawer PaperLift-Up Motor PulseSensor

6/8 IC1A PC1 Un-

blocked

BlockedPJ9A-5B

PC684th Drawer PaperLift-Up Motor PulseSensor

6/8 IC1A PD1 Un-

blockedBlocked PJ9A-4A

PC693rd Drawer LowerPosition Sensor

7/8 IC2A PD1 Not atlowerlimit

Atlowerlimit

PJ4A-7A

PC704th Drawer LowerPosition Sensor

7/8 IC2A PC0 Not atlowerlimit

Atlowerlimit

PJ4A-8A

PWB-E13rd Drawer PaperEmpty Board

6/8 IC1A PC0 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ4A-4A

PWB-E24th Drawer PaperEmpty Board

6/8 IC1A PD0 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ4A-3A

UN53rd Drawer PaperDescent Key


UN64th Drawer PaperDescent Key



T-19

PF-5D/AD-8


No.PortNo.

I/O


DisplayCN/PJ

No.Page

H or 1 L or 0



Turnper-

mitted

PJ12A-1~4

M31Duplex Unit Drive Motor


↑Duplex Unit Drive Motor/lock signal

7/8 IC1G PE1 Whenlocked

Whenturned

PJ5G-1

CL31Duplex Unit PaperTake-Up Clutch

7/8 IC1G PA3 OFF ON PJ2G-7

SL31Duplex Unit GateSwitching Solenoid


SL32Duplex Unit Rear Finger Solenoid


SL33Duplex Unit Pick-UpSolenoid

7/8 IC1G FB2 OFF ON PJ2G-12

PC8Duplex Gate HomePosition Sensor

7/8 IC1G PE0 Not athome

At home PJ7G-2

PC9Front/Rear EdgeGuide Plate HomePosition Sensor

7/8 IC1G PC3 Not athome

At home PJ7G-5

PC11Lower Left Door Sensor

5/8 IC2A PB1 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ3A-2

PC13Duplex Unit TurnoverPath Sensor

5/8 IC2A PB0 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ3A-5

PC14Duplex Unit PaperEntry Sensor

7/8 IC1G PC1 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ3G-2

PC15Duplex Unit PaperEmpty Sensor

7/8 IC1G PC2 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ2G-4

PC16Duplex Unit PaperTake-Up Sensor

7/8 IC1G PC0 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ2G-9


5/8 IC1A PC3 Paper

notpresent

Paperpresent

PJ7A-5


5/8 IC1A PE2 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ7A-2

PC31Large Capacity TonerCollecting Box SetSensor

5/8 IC2A PC3 Out of

positionIn

positionPJ2A-2


T-20

1151SBT0300A

PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE31156SBT0301A

3-1. Paper MisfeedWhen a paper misfeed occurs, the Touch Panel shows the corresponding message, misfeed location andpaper location.

BlinkingLight

There is a misfeed atthat location.

SteadyLight

There might be asheet of paperstopped at thatlocation.

1149T002CA

*When option is installed

Blinking/Steady LED Misfeed/Paper Location Ref. Page

Multi Bypass take-up and transport T-22

Transport/separator T-20

Fusing/exit T-24

Copier take-up/vertical transport T-17,18

, Paper Feed Cabinet take-up/vertical transport T-25 to 28 *

, Duplex Unit vertical transport T-30 *

1st Drawer take-up T-17

2nd Drawer take-up T-17

3rd Drawer take-up T-25 to 28 *4th Drawer take-up T-26 *Duplex Unit take-up T-32,33 *

, Duplex Unit storage T-31 *ADF take-up – *ADF transport – *ADF turnover/exit – *Sorter – *LCC – *

<Display Resetting Method>

When misfeed occurs in the option (except Du-plex Unit)

When misfeed occurs in the copier Open and close the Front Door.

Raise and lower the option, or slide the optionaway from, and back up against, the copier.


T-21

<Misfeed Detecting Sensor Layout>

Paper Exit Sensor (S53)

*When options (PF-205+AD-9)are installed

*Duplex UnitVertical TransportSensor (PC12)

*Duplex UnitPaper EntrySensor (PC14)

*Duplex UnitTurnover PathSensor (PC13)

*Duplex Unit PaperEmpty Sensor(PC15)

Paper Leading Edge DetectingSensor (PC54)

*3rd DrawerPaper Take-upSensor (PC21)

Transport Roller Sensor (PC54)

1st Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor(PC56)

2nd DrawerVertical TransportSensor (PC64)

2nd Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor(PC57)

*Vertical Trans-port DetectionSensor 3 (PC17)

*Vertical Trans-port DetectionSensor 4 (PC22)

*Duplex UnitPaper Take-upSensor (PC16)

*4th DrawerPaper Take-upSensor (PC29)

1156T001AB

1st DrawerVertical TransportSensor (PC63)


T-22

1156SBT0302A

3-2. Misfeed Detection Types and Detection Timings The following table lists the types of misfeed detection classified by the misfeed locations and their corre-

sponding detection timings.Note: For the misfeed detection types and detection timings in the options, see the Service Manual for

the options.

<Copier Paper Take-up Misfeed>

Type Detection Timing

Paper take-up failuredetection

1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56 is not blocked (L) even afterthe lapse of approx. 2.2 sec. after 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M11has been energized.

2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC57 is not blocked (L) even afterthe lapse of approx. 2.2 sec. after 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up MotorM12 has been energized.

Paper take-up trailingedge detection

PC56 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T (which varies forpaper sizes) after it has been blocked (L).

PC57 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T (which varies forpaper sizes) after it has been blocked (L).

Paper take-up leadingedge detection

1st Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor PC63 is not blocked (L) even afterthe lapse of approx. 2 sec. after PC56 has been blocked (L).

2nd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor PC64 is not blocked (L) evenafter the lapse of approx. 2 sec. after PC57 has been blocked (L).

Leading edge detection byTransport Roller Sensor

PC54 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 1.3 sec. afterPC63 has been blocked (L).

PC54PC54 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 1.7 sec. afterPC64 has been blocked (L).

<Multi-Bypass Misfeed>


Paper take-up failuredetection

PC54 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 2.5 sec. afterManual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3 has been energized.

<Transport/Separator Misfeed>


Trailing edge detection byTransport Roller SensorPC54

PC54 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T (which varies forpaper sizes) after the TRON signal has been input.

Leading edge detection byPaper Leading Edge De-tecting Sensor PC55

PC55 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 1.2 sec. afterPC54 has been blocked (L).

Trailing edge detection byPC55

PC55 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of approx. 1.2 sec. afterPC54 has been unblocked (H).


T-23

<Fusing/Exit Misfeed>


Leading edge detection byPaper Exit Switch S53

S53 is not deactuated even after the lapse of approx. 2 sec. after theTRON signal has been input.

Trailing edge detection byS53

S53 is not actuated even after the lapse of approx. 2.5 sec. after PC55has been unblocked (H).


T-24

1156SBT0303A

3-3. Misfeed Clearing Procedures1156SBT030301A

1) Copier Paper Take-Up Misfeed

Relevant Electrical Parts

2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC57 1st Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor PC63 2nd Drawer Vertical Transport Sector PC64 Transport Roller Sensor PC54

1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M11 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M12 Paper Transport Clutch CL1 Power Supply Board PWB–C Master Board PWB-A

1156C01TAA


T-25

Copier Paper Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

Paper is not takenup at all. 1

Does the paper being usedmeet product specifica-tions?

NOInstruct the user to use thepaper that meets productspecifications.

Paper is stationarybefore the PaperTake-Up Sensor.

2Is the paper curled, waved,or damp? YES

Change the paper. Instructthe user in how to store thepaper.

3Is the Trailing Edge Stop orEdge Guide in good posi-tion?

NOPosition the edge stop andguide to meet the papersize.

4

Are the Paper Take-Up Rolland Separator Roll de-formed, worn, or dirty withpaper dust?

YES

Clean or change the PaperTake-Up Roll and/or Sepa-rator Roll.

5Is the Paper Take-Up Motor(M11, M12) turning whenthe Start key is pressed?

NOCheck the motor for over-load.

Run the “Controller/Board YES Change PWB-A.

6Check.” Is either of themalfunction codes C032Aand C032B displayed? NO

Change M11, M12, orPWB-C.

Paper is stationaryat the Vertical Trans-port Section.

1Are the Vertical TransportRollers deformed, worn, ordirty with paper dust?

YESClean or change the Verti-cal Transport Rollers.

2

Does PC63 operate proper-ly?Using the IC Port DataCheck function, make an in-put port check on PWB-A(IC3A) APB6.

NO

Check the PC63 actuatorfor operation and, if itchecks okay, change PC63.

3


NO


4


NO


5


NO


Does PC54 operate proper-ly?

YES Change PWB-A.

6

ly?Using the IC Port DataCheck function, make an in-put port check on PWB-A(IC5A) BPB6.

NOCheck the PC54 actuatorfor operation and, if itchecks okay, change PC54.


T-26


Paper is stationaryat the Vertical Trans-port Section

7

Does CL1 operate proper-ly?Using the IC Port DataCheck function, set the dataof PWB-A (IC4A) BPA3 to“0.”

YES

Check the drive transmis-sion path.

Run the “Controller Board YES Change PWB-A.8 Check.” Is the malfunction

code “C0321” displayed? NO Change CL1.


T-27

1156SBT030302A

2) Transport/Separator Misfeed


Transport Roller Sensor PC54 Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 Paper Transport Clutch CL1 Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2

Separator Solenoid SL1 Suction Fan Motor M4 High Voltage Unit HV1 Master Board PWB-A

1156C02TAA


T-28

Transport/Separator Misfeed Clearing Procedure


Paper is station-ary at the Syn-chronizing Roll-

1Is the paper curled, waved ordamp? YES


er.

2

Does CL2 operate properly?Using the IC Port Data Checkfunction, set the data of PWB-A(IC4A) BPA4 to “0.”

YES


Run the “Controller Board YES Change PWB-A.3 Check.” Is the malfunction code

“C0320” displayed? NO Change CL2.

4

Is an adequate length of loopformed before the Synchroniz-ing Roller?

NO

Adjust the loop length usingthe “Loop Adjust (Drawer)”function of “Tech. Rep.Choice.”

Does PC55 operate properly? YES Change PWB-A.

5Using the IC Port Data Checkfunction, make an input portcheck on PWB-A (IC5A) BPB5.

NOCheck the PC55 actuator foroperation and, if it checksokay, change PC55.

Paper is station-ary near the PC

1Is the Pre-Image Transfer GuidePlate deformed or dirty?

YESCorrect, clean, or changethe guide plate.

Drum.

2Are the Image Transfer/PaperSeparator Corona wires deterio-rated or dirty?

YESClean or change the wires.

3Is the paper guide at the PaperSeparator Corona deformed ordirty?

YESClean or change the paperguide.

4Are the Synchronizing Rollersdeformed, worn, or dirty with pa-per dust?

YESClean or change the Syn-chronizing Rollers.

Run the “Controller Board YES Change PWB-A.

5Check.” Is the malfunction code“C031D” or ”C031E” displayed? NO

Change the Image Transfer/Paper Separator CoronasAssy or HV1.

Paper is wedgedat the Paper

1Are the Paper Separator Fin-gers deformed or dirty?

YESClean or change the PaperSeparator Fingers.

Separator Fin-gers.

2

Does SL1 operate properly?Using the IC Port Data Checkfunction, set the data of PWB-A(IC4A) BPA0 to “0.”

YES


Run the “Controller Board YES Change PWB-A.3 Check.” Is the malfunction code

“C0324” displayed? NO Change SL1.


T-29


Paper is station-ary on the Suc-

1Do the Suction Belts turn whenthe Main Drive Motor runs?

NOCheck the drive gears andtiming belt.

tion Belts.Does M4 operate properly?Using the IC Port Data Check YES

Check the Suction Belts.

2 function, set the data of PWB-A(IC4A) BPC2 to “0.” Does M4then run at full speed?

NOChange M4 or PWB-A.


T-30

1156SBT030303A

3) Multi Bypass Misfeed


Manual Feed Paper Empty Sensor PC51 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL51 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3

Master Board PWB-A

1156C03TAA


T-31

Multi Bypass Misfeed Clearing Procedure


Paper is not de-tected.


YES Change PWB-A.

1Using the IC Port DataCheck function, make an in-put port check on PWB-A(IC5A) BPB1.

NO







3

Is the Manual Bypass Pa-per Take-Up Roll deformed,worn, or dirty with paperdust?

YES

Clean or change the Manu-al Bypass Paper Take-UpRoll.

4

Does SL51 operate proper-ly?Using the IC Port DataCheck function, set the dataof PWB-A (IC5A) BPA3 to“0.” Does the roll then godown?

YES


Run the “Controller/Board YES Change PWB-A.5 Check.” Is the malfunction

code ”C0336” displayed? NO Change SL51.

6

Does CL3 operate proper-ly?Using the IC Port DataCheck function, set the dataof PWB-A (IC5A) BPA1 to“0.”

YES


Run the “Controller/Board YES Change PWB-A.7 Check.” Is the malfunction

code “C0337” displayed? NO Change CL3.


T-32

1156SBT030304A

4) Fusing/Exit Misfeed


Paper Exit Switch S53 Suction Fan Motor M4 Master Board PWB-A

1156C04TAA


T-33

Fusing/Exit Misfeed Clearing Procedure


Paper is stationarybefore the FusingRoller.



2Is the Fusing Guide Platedeformed or dirty?

YESClean, correct, or changethe Fusing Guide Plate.

Does M4 operate properly?Using the IC Port DataCheck function, set the data

YESCheck the Suction Belts.

3of PWB-A (IC4A) BPC2 to“0.” Does M4 then turn atfull speed?

NOChange M4 or PWB-A.

Paper is stationaryat the Fusing Roller.

1Are the Fusing Rollers dirtyor scratched?

YESClean or change the FusingRollers.

2Are the Fusing Roller PaperSeparator Fingers de-formed, worn, or dirty?

YESClean, correct, or changethe defective separator fin-gers.

3 Is the Cleaning Roller dirtyor scratched?

YESClean or change the Clean-ing Roller.

Paper is stationaryat the Exit Roller.

Does S53 operate proper-ly?

YES Change PWB-A.

1Using the IC Port DataCheck function, make an in-put port check of PWB-A(IC5A) BPB3.

NO

Check the S53 actuator foroperation and, if it checksokay, change S53.


T-34

1156SBT030305A

5) PF-205 Paper Take-Up Misfeed


3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC21 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC29 Vertical Transport Sensor 3 PC17 Vertical Transport Sensor 4 PC22

3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M22 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M23 Vertical Transport Drive Motor M21 PF-205 Master Board PWB-A EP5000/EP4000 Master Board PWB-A

1156C24TAA


T-35


Paper is not tak-en up at all. 1

Does the paper being usedmeet product specifications? NO

Instruct the user to usethe paper that meetsproduct specifications.

Paper is station-ary before thePaper Take-Up

2Is the paper curled, waved, ordamp? YES

Change the paper.Instruct the user in howto store the paper.

Sensor.

4Are the Paper Take-Up Roll andSeparator Roll deformed, worn,or dirty with paper dust?

YESClean or change the Pa-per Take-Up Roll and/orSeparator Roll.

Is the Paper Take-Up Motor(M22, M23) turning when theStart key is pressed?

Check the motor foroverload.

Change PWB-A5 NO

(PF-205) or PWB-A (copier).Change M22 or M23.

Paper is stationaryat the VerticalTransport Section.

Is Vertical Transport Drive MotorM21 turning when the Start keyis pressed?

Check the motor foroverload.

Change PWB-A1 NO

(PF-205) or PWB-A (copier).Change M21.

2Are the Vertical Transport Roll-ers deformed, worn, or dirty withpaper dust?

YESClean or change the Ver-tical Transport Rollers.

3

Does PC17 operate properly?Using the IC Port Data Checkfunction, make an input portcheck on PWB-A (200) IC1APC3 (metric areas) or PWB-A(MC) IC1A PC3 (inch areas).

NO

Check the PC17 actuatorfor operation and, if it op-erates properly, changePC17.

4

Does PC22 operate properly?Using the IC Port Data Checkfunction, make an input portcheck on PWB-A (200) IC1APC2 (metric areas) or PWB-A(MC) IC1A PC2 (inch areas).

NO


5

Does PC21 operate properly?Using the IC Port Data Checkfunction, make an input portcheck on PWB-A (200) IC1APE3 (metric areas) or PWB-A(MC) IC1A PE3 (inch areas).

NO


Does PC29 operate properly?Using the IC Port Data Check

YESChange PWB-A (PF-205)or PWB-A (copier).

6 function, make an input portcheck on PWB-A (200) IC1APB3 (metric areas) or PWB-A(MC) IC1A PB3 (inch areas).

NO



T-36

1156SBT030306A

6) PF-105 Paper Take-Up Misfeed


3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC21 Vertical Transport Sensor 3 PC17 Vertical Transport Sensor 4 PC22

3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M22 Vertical Transport Drive Motor M21 PF-105 Master Board PWB-A EP5000/EP4000 Master Board PWB-A

1156C26TAA


T-37





Paper is stationarybefore the PaperTake-Up Sensor.



4

Are the Paper Take-Up Rolland Separator Roll de-formed, worn, or dirty withpaper dust?

YES

Clean or change the PaperTake-up Roll and/or Sepa-rator Roll.

Is 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M22 turning when

Check the motor for over-load.

5 the Start key is pressed? NO Change PWB-A (PF-105)or PWB-A (copier).Change M22.

Paper is stationaryat the Vertical Trans-

Is Vertical Transport DriveMotor M21 turning when the

Check the motor for over-load.

port Section. 1 Start key is pressed? NO Change PWB-A (PF-105)or PWB-A (copier).Change M21.


YESClean or change the Verti-cal Transport Rollers.

3

Does PC17 operate proper-ly?Using the IC Port DataCheck function, make an in-put port check on PWB-A(400) (IC1A) PC3.

NO

Check the PC17 actuatorfor operation and, if it oper-ates properly, changePC17.

4

Does PC22 operate proper-ly?Using the IC Port DataCheck function, make an in-put port check on PWB-A(400) (IC1A) PC2.

NO


Does PC21 operate proper-ly?Using the IC Port Data

YESChange PWB-A (PF-105)or PWB-A (copier).Change M21.

5 Check function, make an in-put port check on PWB-A(400) (IC1A) PE3. NO



T-38

1156SBT030307A

7) AD-9 Vertical Transport/Storage Misfeed


Vertical Transport Sensor 3 PC17 Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Sensor PC12 Duplex Unit Turnover Path Sensor PC13 Duplex Unit Paper Entry Sensor PC14 Duplex Unit Paper Empty Sensor PC15 Vertical Transport Sensor 3 PC17

Exit/Duplex Switching Solenoid SL5 Duplex Unit Gate Switching Solenoid SL31 Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 Duplex Unit Master Board PWB-G PF-205/105 Master Board PWB-A EP5000/EP4000 Master Board PWB-A

1156C30TAA


T-39

AD-9 Vertical Transport Misfeed Clearing Procedure


Paper is stationaryat the copier exitsection.

1

Does SL5 operate proper-ly?Using the IC Port DataCheck function, set the dataof PWB-A (IC4A) BPA5 to“0.”

YES


Run the “Controller Board YES Change PWB-A.2 Check.” Is the malfunction

code “C0324” displayed? NO Change SL51.

Paper is stationaryat the Duplex UnitVertical TransportSection.

1

Do the Vertical TransportRoller and drive couplingoperate properly when M31is running?Using the IC Port DataCheck function, set the dataof PWB-G (Dup) (IC1G)PB3 to “0.”

NO

Check the gears, belts, androllers.

Does PC12 operate proper- YES Change PWB-A.

2

ly?Using the IC Port DataCheck function, make an in-put port check of PWB-A(IC5A) BPB0.

NO


Paper is stationaryat the Duplex UnitTurnover Section.

1

Do the Paddle Roller, SlipRoller, and drive couplingoperate properly when M31is running?Using the IC Port DataCheck function, set the dataof PWB-G (Dup) (IC1G)PB3 to “0.”

NO

Check the gears, belts, androllers.


YESChange PWB-A (copier) orPWB-A (PF-205/105).

2Using the IC Port DataCheck function, make an in-put port check of PWB-A(200/400) (IC2A) PB0.

NO



T-40

AD-9 Storage Misfeed Clearing Procedure


The leading edge ofthe paper is station-

1Is the Paper Guide Mylardirty or deformed?

YESClean or change the mylar.

ary inside the Du-plex Unit.

Does PC14 operate proper-ly? Using the IC Port DataCheck function, make an in-

YESChange PWB-G, PWB-A(copier), or PWB-A(PF-205/105).

2 put port check on PWB-A(Dup) (IC1G) PC1.

NO


Does SL31 operate proper-ly?

YESCheck the Gate SwitchingLever for operation.

3Using the IC Port DataCheck function, set the dataof PWB-A (Dup) (IC1G)PH1 to “0.”

NO

Change PWB-G, PWB-A(copier), or PWB-A(PF-205/105). ChangeSL31.

Paper is stationaryat the storage sec-tion.

Does PC15 operate proper-ly?Using the IC Port Data

YESChange PWB-G, PWB-A(copier), or PWB-A(PF-205/105).

1 Check function, make an in-put port check of PWB-A(Dup) (IC1G) C2. NO



T-41

1156SBT030308A

8) AD-9 Paper Take-Up Misfeed


Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Sensor PC16 Vertical Transport Sensor 3 PC17 Vertical Transport Drive Motor M21 Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Clutch CL31

Duplex Unit Pick-Up Solenoid SL33 Duplex Unit Master Board PWB-G PF-205/105 Master Board PWB-A EP5000/EP4000 Master Board PWB-A

1156C31TAA


T-42

AD-9 Paper Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure


Paper is not takenup at all.

Does SL33 operate proper-ly?

YESCheck the pick-up mecha-nism.

1Using the IC Port DataCheck function, set the dataof PWB-A (Dup) (IC1G)PB2 to “0.”

NO

Change PWB-G, PWB-A(copier), or PWB-A(PF-205/105). ChangeSL33.

Does CL33 operate proper-ly?

YESCheck the drive transmis-sion path.

2Using the IC Port DataCheck function, set the dataof PWB-A (Dup) (IC1G)PA3 to “0.”

NO

Change PWB-G, PWB-A(copier), or PWB-A(PF-205/105). ChangeCL31.

3

Are the Take-Up Roll, FeedRoll, and Separator Roll de-formed, worn, or dirty withpaper dust?

YES

Clean or change the defec-tive roll.

Paper is stationaryat the Vertical Trans-

Is Vertical Transport DriveMotor M21 turning when a

YESCheck the motor for over-load.

port Section. 1 copy is taken up and fedinto the copier from the Du-plex Unit?

NOChange PWB-A (copier) orPWB-A (PF-205/105).Change M21.


YESClean or change the defec-tive roller.



3Using the IC Port DataCheck function, make an in-put port check of PWB-A(200, 400) (IC1A) PC3.

NO




4Using the IC Port DataCheck function, make an in-put port check of PWB-A(Dup) (IC1G) PC0.

NO



T-43

1151SBT0400A

MALFUNCTIONS41156SBT0401A

4-1. Detection Timings Classified by Malfunction Codes The codes marked with an asterisk (*) are the candidates for isolated malfunctions.

C00## Drive Malfunctions 1156SBT040101A

* Code Description Detection Timing

C0000Main Drive Motor M1’s failure to turn The lock signal remains HIGH for a continu-

ous 2.0-sec. or more period while M1 is ener-gized.

C0001Main Drive Motor M1 turning at abnor-mal timing

The lock signal remains LOW for a continu-ous 1.5-sec. or more period while M1 is deen-ergized.

C0040Suction Fan Motor M4’s failure to turn The lock signal remains HIGH for a continu-

ous 1.0-sec. or more period while M4 is ener-gized.

C0046Fusing Section Cooling Fan MotorM15’s failure to turn

The lock signal remains HIGH for a continu-ous 2.0-sec. or more period while M15 is en-ergized.

* C0047Fusing Section Cooling Fan MotorM15 turning at abnormal timing

The lock signal remains LOW for a continu-ous 2.0-sec. or more period while M15 isdeenergized.

C004AOriginal Glass Cooling Fan MotorM5’s failure to turn

The lock signal remains HIGH for a continu-ous 2.0-sec. or more period while M5 is ener-gized.

* C004bOriginal Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5turning at abnormal timing


C004cVentilation Fan Motor M3’s failure toturn

The lock signal remains HIGH for a continu-ous 2.0-sec. or more period while M3 is ener-gized.

* C004dVentilation Fan Motor M3 turning atabnormal timing


C0070

Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mo-tor M8’s failure to turn

Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35does not go from HIGH to LOW within 12 sec.after M8 has been energized.

PC35 does not go LOW within 12 sec. afterM8 has been energized and PC35 goneHIGH.

C0071Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mo-tor M8 turning at abnormal timing

PC35 is HIGH 2 sec. after M8 has been deen-ergized.

C0072

Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing MotorM9’s failure to turn

When the current toner-to-carrier ratio is 2%lower than the SCH-90 setting and the AddToner Indicator is not lit on the control panel, atoner replenishing sequence is carried out(M9 is turned); the toner-to-carrier ratio doesnot increase by 1% within 140 seconds or by2% within 220 seconds.


T-44

C02## Corona Malfunction 1156SBT040102A


C0200PC Drum Charge, Image Transfer, Pa-per Separator Corona malfunction

The leak signal (SCD) turns ON after the PCDrum Charge and Image Transfer/Paper Sep-arator Corona output has been turned ON.

C03## Master Board/Harness Malfunctions 1156SBT040103A

The copier performs a self-diagnostic sequence to determine if the microprocessor outputs a signal toeach of the IC ports on Master Board PWB-A properly. It is intended for detecting the following malfunc-tions (C03##).

Any malfunction is detected when “Controller Board Check” available from the “I/O Check” function of theTech. Rep. mode is executed.

If the microprocessor fails to output any of these signals or if any of the electronic components on the board(driver IC, etc.) is faulty, the copier determines that there is a faulty condition existing and shows the corre-sponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel.

C0350, C0351, C0352, C0353, or C0357 is displayed when there is a communication fault between thecopier and paper feeder option or Duplex Unit, and detected as an isolated malfunction when the PowerSwitch is turned ON.

* Code Description Master Board Port

C0300 Port diagnosis cannot be started. —

C0310 Drum Dehumidifying Heater H2 REM signal IC1A P45

C0311 Fusing Heater Lamp H1 REM signal IC1A P57

C0312 Exposure Lamp Regulator PWB-J REM signal IC1A P61

C0313 AE Sensor Board PWB-H PWM signal IC1A P60

C0314 Image Erase Lamp LA3 DATA IC1A P64

C0315 Image Erase Lamp LA3 MODE IC1A P65

C0316 Image Erase Lamp LA3 CLOCK IC1A P66

C0317 Image Erase Lamp LA3 STROBE IC1A P67

C0318 Copy vendor count (during copy cycle) IC3A APA1

C0319 Copy vendor count (size) IC3A APA0

C031A 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M12 energization IC3A φ1

C031B 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M11 energization IC3A φO

C031C Original size detection IC4A APA7

C031D Original size detection, marketing area 2 IC4A APA6

C031E Original size detection, marketing area 1 IC4A APA5

C031F Scanner Motor M2 SCAN signal IC4A APC0

C0320 Scanner Motor M2 ENABLE signal IC4A APC1

C0321 Fusing Section Cooling Fan Motor M15 REM signal IC4A APC2

C0322 Separator/Developing Bias output REM signal IC4A BPA7

C0323 PC Drum Charge/Image Transfer output REM signal IC4A BPA6

C0324 Exit/Duplex Switching Solenoid SL5 IC4A BPA5

C0325 Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 IC4A BPA4

C0326 Paper Transport Clutch CL1 IC4A BPA3

C0327 Main Drive Motor M1 REM signal IC4A BPA2

C0328 Main Erase Lamp LA2 REM signal IC4A BPA1

C0329 Separator Solenoid SL1 REM signal IC4A BPA0


T-45

* Code Description Master Board Port

C032A Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 IC4A BPC3

C032B Suction Fan Motor M4 33/ Ventilation Fan Motor M3 IC4A BPC2

C032C Ventilation Fan Motor M3 IC4A BPC1

C032D 2nd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M14 DOWN IC5A APA7

C032E 2nd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M14 UP IC5A APA6

C032F 1st Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M13 DOWN IC5A APA5

C0330 1st Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M13 UP IC5A APA4

C0331 Separator bias switching IC5A APA3

C0332 Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 IC5A APA2

C0333 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M12 ENABLE IC5A APA1

C0334 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M11 ENABLE IC5A APA0

C0335 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4 UP IC5A BPA2

C0336 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4 DOWN IC5A BPA3

C0337 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3 IC5A BPA1

C0338 Warming-up completion signal IC5A BPA7

C0339 During copy cycle IC5A BPA6

C033A SSR2 REM signal (MH only) IC5A BPA5

C033B Exposure Lamp Regulator PWB-J PWM signal IC4A TOUT

C033C Grid PWM signal IC5A TOUT

C0350 Paper Feed Cabinet S/P-0 IC3 SO0

C0351 Paper Feed Cabinet S/P-1 IC3 SO1

C0352 Duplex Unit S/P-2 IC3 SO2

C0353 Large Capacity Cassette S/P-3 IC3 SO3

C0357 IC3 S13


T-46

1156SBT040104A

C04## Exposure Lamp Malfunctions


C0400 Exposure Lamp LA1’s failure to turnON

The output from AE Sensor Board PWB-Hdoes not become 4.0V or more for the periodbetween when LA1 turns ON and the Scannerstarts a scan motion and when the ImageLeading Edge signal (BASE) turns ON.

C0410 Exposure Lamp LA1 turning ON at ab-normal timing

With LA1 OFF, the output from PWB-H re-mains 3.9V or less for a continuous 3-sec.period at any timing while the Scanner is atthe home position or the Original Cover islowered.

1156SBT040105A

C05## Fusing Malfunctions


C0500 Warming-up failure (Fusing Heater Lamp failure)

The surface temperature of the Upper FusingRoller does not reach a given level even after thelapse of a given period of time during warming-upas detailed below:

If the temperature is 165C or less when the Pow-er Switch is turned ON:

From room temperature 105S 60S to 65C

65C~140C 210S 110S

EP4051 EP3051

140C~170C 220S 120S

*170C~200C 145S 100S

*170C~190C 145S 100S

If the temperature is more than 165C when thePower Switch is turned ON:

EP4051 EP3051

*A 200C temperature control is provided for thefirst 1 hour after the Power Switch has beenturned ON and 190C temperature control isprovided thereafter.

*~200C 200S 120S *~190C 200S 120S

C0510 Abnormally low fusing temperature(Fusing Heater Lamp failure)

The surface temperature of the Upper FusingRoller remains 135°C or less for a continuous5-sec. period or more after the copier has com-pleted warming up.

C0520 Abnormally high fusing temperature(Fusing Heater Lamp turning ON atabnormal timing)

The surface temperature of the Upper FusingRoller remains 230°C or more for a continuous5-sec. period or more after the copier has com-pleted warming up.


T-47

1156SBT040106A

C06## Optical Malfunctions


C0600 Scanner Motor M2 malfunction When the Scanner is at a position other thanhome, Scanner Reference Position SensorPC81 does not go from HIGH to LOW even afterthe lapse of 20 sec. after the Power Switch hasbeen turned ON.

When the Scanner is at the home position, PC81does not go from LOW to HIGH even after thelapse of 5 sec. after the Scanner has started ascan motion.

PC81 does not go from HIGH to LOW even afterthe lapse of 20 sec. after the Scanner has starteda scan motion.

C0610 Lens Motor M6 malfunction The output from Lens Reference Position SensorPC90 does not go from HIGH to LOW, or viceversa, even after the lapse of 15 sec. after M6has started turning.

C0620 Mirror Motor M7 malfunction The output from Mirror Reference Position Sen-sor PC86 does not go from HIGH to LOW evenafter the lapse of 10 sec. after M7 has startedturning.

The output from PC86 does not go from LOW toHIGH even after the lapse of 3 sec. after M7 hasstarted turning.

C06F0 SHOME signal failure (Signal doesnot go LOW)

When the Scanner is at a position other thanhome, the SHOME signal does not go HIGHeven after the lapse of 7 sec. after the SCAN sig-nal has gone LOW.

The SHOME signal is HIGH even after the lapseof 5 sec. after the BASE signal has gone fromLOW to HIGH.

C06F1 SHOME signal failure (Signal doesnot go HIGH)

The SHOME signal remains LOW even after thelapse of 7 sec. after it has gone LOW.

C06F2 BASE signal failure (Signal doesnot go LOW)

The BASE signal does not go LOW even afterthe lapse of 5 sec. after the SHOME signal hasgone HIGH.

C06F3 BASE signal failure (Signal doesnot go HIGH)

The BASE signal remains LOW even after thelapse of 5 sec. after the SHOME signal has goneHIGH.

C06F4 TRON signal failure (Signal doesnot go LOW)

The TRON signal remains HIGH even after thelapse of 5 sec. after the BASE signal has goneLOW.

C06F5 TRON signal failure (Signal doesnot go HIGH)

The TRON signal remains LOW even after thelapse of 5 sec. after it has gone LOW.

C06F6 SCEND signal failure (Signal doesnot go LOW)

The SCEND signal remains HIGH even after thelapse of 5 sec. after the TRON signal has goneLOW.

C06F7 SCEND signal failure (Signal doesnot go HIGH)

The SCEND signal remains LOW even after thelapse of 5 sec. after it has gone LOW.


T-48

1156SBT040107A

C09## Paper Take-Up Malfunctions


C0900 3rd Drawer upward motion failure

C0901(Inch Area)

3rd Drawer downward motion fail-ure

C0902(Inch Area)

3rd Drawer downward motion fail-ure

C0903(Inch Area)

3rd Drawer upward motion failure

C09043rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor M24’s fail-ure to turn

C0906(Inch Area)

3rd Drawer ejection failure

*C0950 4th Drawer upward motion failure

See PF-205 Service Manual.

C0951(Inch Area)

4th Drawer downward motion failure

C0952(Inch Area)

4th Drawer downward motion failure

C0953(Inch Area)

4th Drawer upward motion failure

C09544th Drawer Lift-Up Motor M25’s fail-ure to turn

C0956(Inch Area)

4th Drawer ejection failure


T-49


C0910

2nd Drawer upward motion failure 2nd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor PC66 is not blocked(L) even after the lapse of 5 sec. after 2nd DrawerPaper Lift-Up Motor M14 has been energized.

PC66 is not blocked (L) even if 2nd Drawer Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor PC68 detects 75 pulsesafter M14 has been energized.

C0911

2nd Drawer downward motion fail-ure

When PC66 is blocked (L), it is not unblocked (H)even after the lapse of 5 sec. after M14 has beenenergized.

PC66 is not unblocked (H) even if PC68 detects10 pulses after M14 has been energized.

C0912

2nd Drawer downward motion fail-ure

When PC66 is unblocked (H), 2nd Drawer LowerLimit Position Sensor PC70 is not blocked (L)even after the lapse of 5 sec. after M14 has beenenergized.

PC70 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapseof 1.5 sec. after it has been blocked (L).

PC70 is not blocked (L) even if PC68 detects 75pulses after M14 has been energized.

PC70 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of 2sec. after M14 has been energized.

C0913

2nd Drawer upward motion failure When PC70 is blocked (L), it is not unblocked (H)even after the lapse of 5 sec. after M14 has beenenergized.

PC70 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapseof 2 sec. after it has been blocked (L).

*

C0914

2nd Drawer Paper Lift–Up MotorM14’s failure to turn

PC68 detects no pulses even after the lapse of500 msec. after M14 has been energized.

PC68 detects no pulses for the period of 200msec. while M14 is being energized.*

C0916 2nd Drawer ejection failure The 2nd Drawer is not ejected even after thelapse of 2 sec. after PC70 has been blocked (L).

C0920

1st Drawer upward motion failure 1st Drawer Lift-Up Sensor PC65 is not blocked(L) even after the lapse of 5 sec. after 1st DrawerPaper Lift-Up Motor M13 has been energized.

PC65 is not blocked (L) even if 1st Drawer Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor PC67 detects 75 pulsesafter M13 has been energized.

C0921

1st Drawer downward motion failure When PC65 is blocked (L), it is not unblocked(H) even after the lapse of 5 sec. after M13 hasbeen energized.

PC65 is not unblocked (H) even if PC67 detects10 pulses after M13 has been energized.

C0922

1st Drawer downward motion failure When PC65 is unblocked (H), 1st Drawer LowerLimit Position Sensor PC69 is not blocked (L)even after the lapse of 5 sec. after M13 has beenenergized.

PC69 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapseof 1.5 sec. after it has been blocked (L).

PC69 is not blocked (L) even if PC67 detects 75pulses after M13 has been energized.

PC69 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of 2sec. after M13 has been energized.

C0923

1st Drawer upward motion failure When PC69 is blocked (L), it is not unblocked (H)even after the lapse of 5 sec. after M13 has beenenergized.

PC69 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapseof 2 sec. after it has been blocked (L).


T-50


*C0924

1st Drawer Paper Lift–Up MotorM13’s failure to turn

PC67 detects no pulses even after the lapse of500 msec. after M13 has been energized.

PC67 detects no pulses for the period of 200msec. while M13 is being energized.

C0926 1st Drawer ejection failure The 1st Drawer is not ejected even after thelapse of 2 sec. after PC69 has been blocked (L).


T-51


C0990 Main Tray upward motion failure

C0991 Main Tray downward motion failure

C0992 Main Tray downward motion failure

C0993 Main Tray upward motion failure

C0994 Elevator Motor M26’s failure to turn

C0996 Main Tray ejection failure

C0998 Shifter transfer failure See PF-105 Service Manual.

* C0999 Shifter return failure

C099A Shifter return failure

C099b Shifter transfer failure

C099C Shift Motor M27’s failure to turn

C099E Shift Gate position detecting failure

C099F Shift Gate position detecting failure

C09C0 Elevator ascent fault See C-301 Service Manual.

C09C2 Elevator descent fault


T-52

1156SBT040108A

C0E## Erase Lamp Malfunctions


C0E00Main Erase Lamp LA2’s failure toturn ON

The LA2 Failure Detection signal remains HIGHfor a continuous 1-sec. period while LA2 is ON.

C0E01Main Erase Lamp LA2 turning ONat abnormal timing

The LA2 Failure Detection signal remains LOWfor a continuous 1-sec. period while LA2 is OFF.

C0E20

Image Erase Lamp LA3’s failure toturn ON

The LA3 gate array is faulty as found through aself-diagnostic sequence carried out immediatelyafter Main Drive Motor M1 has been deener-gized.

1156SBT040109A

C0F## Sensor Malfunctions


* C0F02

Original Size Detecting Board UN2malfunction

Undefined data is input to the master CPU. Under normal conditions:A fixed-cycle pulse signal (Busy) remains HIGHor LOW for 3 sec. or more. When the Power Switch is ON:A fixed-cycle pulse signal (Busy) remains HIGHor LOW for 5 sec. or more.

C0F10

AE Sensor Board PWB-H malfunc-tion

The output from PWB-H remains approx. 0.18Vor less for a continuous 2-sec. period, with theExposure Lamp OFF, the Scanner at the homeposition, and the Original Cover lowered.

* C0F20

AIDC Sensor Board PWB-G varia-tion correction failure

In the initial F5 or FF mode: The output from PWB-G is 1V or more when the

load resistance is made maximum by the 4-bitanalog switch.

The output from PWB-G is less than 1V when theload resistance is made minimum by the 4-bitanalog switch.

The output from PWB-G does not fall within the0.9V-1.1V range when the intensity of PWB-GLED is varied.

* C0F22

AIDC Sensor Board PWB-G gridvoltage (Vg) correction failure

In the initial F5 or FF mode:1) Vg of 580V is output.2) A solid black pattern is produced and thePWB-G output is sampled.3) If the average is less than 4.3V, Vg is in-creased.

* C0F23

AIDC Sensor Board PWB-G expo-sure correction failure

In the initial F5 or FF mode:1) The Exposure Lamp is turned ON with58V.2) A halftone pattern is produced and thePWB-G output is sampled.3) If the average does not fall within the tar-get range, the exposure level is varied.4) The average does not fall within the targetrange even after steps 1) to 3) have been re-peated 15 times.


T-53


*C0F30

ATDC Sensor UN3 adjustment fail-ure

The UN3 output does not fall within the targetrange in the F8 mode.

C0F31

ATDC Sensor UN3 failure The “ATDC Ref. Value” of “Level History” drasti-cally deviates from the value set in the FF mode.

The UN3 output remains 0.5V or less or 4.2V ormore for a consecutive 3-sec. period 2 sec. afterMain Drive Motor M1 has been energized.

C0F79

3rd Drawer Paper Empty SensorPC20 failure

Main Tray Paper Empty BoardPWB-E failure

Shift Tray Paper Empty SensorPC1 failure

See the PF-105 Service Manual.

Paper Empty Sensor EMPSEN fail-ure

See the C-301 Service Manual.


T-54

Code Description Sensor Layout

C0FE1Original Size DetectingSensor failure

<Detection Timing>After having read the output data from PC115 to


PC119, UN2 determines that there is a failure.

C0FE3Original Size DetectingSensors and failure

<Sensor Layout>Metric Areas

: PC116, : PC117, : PC118 (option),


: PC115, : PC119 (option) A to E: Sensor locations


d * C0FE6

Original Size DetectingSensors , and failure

A

ng B

oard

C0FE7Original Size DetectingSensors ,, and failure

B C D E

Det

ecti


A

B

inal

Siz

e


Orig

C0FEAOriginal Size DetectingSensors and failure

Inch Areas: PC116 (option), : PC117, : PC118 (option), : PC115, : PC119 (option)

C0FEBOriginal Size DetectingSensors ,, and failure

C0FECOriginal Size DetectingSensors and failure

A

B C D E

C0FEDOriginal Size DetectingSensors ,, and failure A

C0FEEOriginal Size DetectingSensors ,, and failure

B

C0FEFOriginal Size DetectingSensors ,,, and failure


T-55

Code Description Sensor Layout

C0FF0Original Size DetectingSensor failure

Metric Areas: PC116, : PC117, : PC118 (option),

C0FF1Original Size DetectingSensors and failure

: PC115, : PC119 (option) A to E: Sensor locations


C0FF3Original Size DetectingSensors ,, and failure

A


B C D E


AB

Boa

rd *


tect

ing

C0FF7Original Size DetectingSensors ,,, and failure

Siz

e D

e


Inch Areas: PC116 (option), : PC117, : PC118 (option), : PC115, : PC119 (option)

rigin

al S


O

C0FFAOriginal Size DetectingSensors ,, and failure

A

B C D E

C0FFBOriginal Size DetectingSensors ,,, and failure A

C0FFCOriginal Size DetectingSensors ,, and failure

B

C0FFDOriginal Size DetectingSensors ,,, and failure

C0FFEOriginal Size DetectingSensors ,,, and failure

C0FFFOriginal Size DetectingSensors ,,,, and failure (Metric Areas)


T-56

1156SBT040110A

C0b## Staple Sorter/Sorter Malfunctions


C0b00 Transport drive malfunction See the ST-210/S-207 Service Manual.

C0b01

C0b10 Paper Clamp Unit motion failure See the ST-210/S-207, ST-101/S-104 Ser-

C0b11 vice Manual.

C0b12 See the ST-210/S-207 Service Manual.

C0b13

C0b30 Paper Aligning Mechanism drive failure See the ST-210/S-207, ST-101/S-104 Ser-

C0b31 vice Manual.

C0b50 Stapling failure

C0b51

C0b52

C0b53

C0b60 Bin motion failure See the ST-210/S-207, ST-101/S-104 Ser-

* C0b61 vice Manual.

C0b62

C0b63

C0b64

C0b65

C0b70 Hole punching failure See the ST-210/S-207 Service Manual.

C0b71

C0b72

1156SBT040111A

C0d## Duplex Unit Malfunctions


C0d00Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates homeposition detection failure

See the AD-5 Service Manual.

C0d20 Gate Unit home position detection failure

C0d50Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31’s failure toturn

C0d51Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 turning atabnormal timing


T-57

1156SBT0402A

4-2. Troubleshooting Procedures1156SBT040201A

1) C0000: Main Drive Motor M1’s Failure to Turn

C0001: Main Drive Motor M1 Turning at Abnormal Timing


Main Drive Motor M1 Master Board PWB-A

1156C05TAA


T-58

C0000

Step Check Item Result Action

1Does M1 turn?Set the data of PWB-A (IC4A) BPA2 to“0.”

YESChange PWB-A.

Perform the “Controller Board Check.” YES Change PWB-A.

2Is malfunction code “C0327” dis-played? NO

Check the drive coupling.

Change M1.

C0001


1Does M1 turn when the malfunction isreset?

YESChange PWB-A.

2Is malfunction code “C0001” displayedagain?

YESChange PWB-A.


T-59

1156SBT040202A

2) C0040: Suction Fan Motor M4’s Failure to Turn


Suction Fan Motor M4 Master Board PWB-A

1156C06TAA


T-60

C0040


1Does M4 turn?Set the data of PWB-A (IC4A) BPC2 to“0.”

YESChange PWB-A.

Perform the “Controller Board Check.” YES Change PWB-A.2 Is malfunction code “C032B” dis-

played? NO Change M4.

C0011



YESChange PWB-A.


YESChange PWB-A.


T-61

1156SBT040203A

3) C0046: Fusing Section Cooling Fan Motor M15’s Failure to Turn

C0047: Fusing Section Cooling Fan Motor M15 Turning at Abnormal Timing


Fusing Section Cooling Fan Motor M15 Master Board PWB-A

1156C07TAA


T-62

C0046


1Does M15 turn?Set the data of PWB-A (IC4A) APC2 to“0.”

YESChange PWB-A.

Perform the “Controller Board Check.” YES Change PWB-A.2 Is malfunction code “C0321” dis-


C0047



YESChange PWB-A or M15


YESChange PWB-A or M15


T-63

1156SBT040204A

4) C004A: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5’s Failure to Turn

C004b: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 Turning at Abnormal Timing

C004C: Ventilation Fan Motor M3’s Failure to Turn

C004d: Ventilation Fan Motor M3 Turning at Abnormal Timing


Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 Ventilation Fan Motor M3

Master Board PWB-A

1156C08TAA


T-64

C004A


Does M5 turn? YES Change PWB-A.1 Set the data of PWB-A (IC4A) BPC0 to

“0.” NO Change M5.

C004b



YESChange PWB-A.

2Is malfunction code “C004b” displayedagain?

YESChange PWB-A.

C004C


Does M3 turn? YES Change PWB-A.1 Set the data of PWB-A (IC4A) BPC1 to

“0.” NO Change M3.

C004d



YESChange PWB-A.

2Is malfunction code “C004d” displayedagain?

YESChange PWB-A.


T-65

1156SBT040205A

5) C0070: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8’s Failure to Turn

C0071: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 Turning at Abnormal Timing

C0072: Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9’s Failure to Turn


Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35

Master Board PWB-A

1156C09TAA


T-66

C0070


1Turn the Toner Bottle a half turn byhand and close the Front Door. Doesthe Toner Bottle turn at this time?

NOGo to step 3.

2Does PC35 operate properly?Make an input port check on PWB-A(IC4A) BPC5.

NOChange PC35.

Perform the “Controller Board Check.” YES Change PWB-A.3 Is malfunction code “C032A” dis-


C0071



YESChange PWB-A.


YESChange PWB-A.

C0072


1Does M9 turn?Set the data of PWB-A (IC5A) APA2 to“0.”

YESChange PWB-A.

Perform the “Controller Board Check.” YES Change PWB-A.2 Is malfunction code ”C0332” dis-



T-67

1156SBT040206A

6) C0200: Corona Malfunctions


High Voltage Unit HV1 Master Board PWB-A

1156C10TAA


1

Is “C0200” displayed even when thePC Drum Charge Corona and ImageTransfer/Paper Separator Coronas areremoved?

YES

Go to step 4.

2Is “C0200” displayed when the PCDrum Charge Corona is installed?

YESClean or change the PC Drum ChargeCorona.

3Is “C0200” displayed when the ImageTransfer/Paper Separator Coronas unitis installed?

YESClean or change the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas.

Is “C0200” displayed even when the YES Change PWB-A.4 HV1 connector is unplugged? NO Change HV1.


T-68

1156SBT040207A

7) C03##: Master Board/Harness Malfunctions


Master Board PWB-A PF-205/105 Master Board PWB-A Duplex Unit Master Board PWB-G

C0300 to C033C

Step Action

1 Change Master Board PWB-A.

C0350, C0351

Step Action

1 Check the connections from PJ20A on PWB-A to PJ13A on PF–205/105 PWB-A.

2 Change PWB-A or PF-205/105 PWB-A.

C0352

Step Action

1Check the connections from PJ20A on PWB-A to PJ8G on Duplex Unit Master Board PWB-G.

2 Change PWB-A, PF-205/105 PWB-A, or Duplex Unit Master Board PWB-G.

C0353, C0357

Step Action

1 Check the connections from PJ20A on PWB-A to CN1A on C-301 PWB-A.

2 Change PWB-A or C-301 PWB-A.


T-69

1156SBT040208A

8) C0400: Exposure Lamp LA1’s Failure to Turn ON

C0410: Exposure Lamp LA1 Turning ON at Abnormal Timing


Exposure Lamp LA1 Exposure Thermal Fuse TF1

Exposure Lamp Regulator PWB-J AE Sensor Board PWB-H Master Board PWB-A

1156C11TAA


T-70


1Does the voltage across PWB-APJ8A-13 and GND become DC0V (L)when the Start key is pressed?

YESGo to step 2.

2Perform the “Controller Board Check.”Is malfunction code “C0312” or“C033B” displayed?

YESChange PWB-A.

3Disconnect CN7. Is there continuityacross CN7-1 and -2 on LA1 side?

NOChange LA1 or TF1.

Is the voltage across PJ3J-1 and –3 on YES Change PWB-J.4 PWB-J the source voltage? NO Check the power supply line.

Is the voltage across PWB-A PJ3A-2and GND 3.9V or less when LA1 is off,

YES Change PWB-A.

5the Scanner is at the home position,and the Original Cover is lowered? NO Change PWB-H.


T-71

1156SBT040209A

9) C0500: Warming-up Failure

C0510: Abnormally Low Fusing Temperature

C0520: Abnormally High Fusing Temperature


Fusing Heater Lamp H1 Fusing Thermoswitch TS1 Fusing Thermistor TH1 Fusing Thermistor TH2

Fusing Heater Lamp SSR SSR1 Master Board PWB-A

1156C12TAA


T-72

C0500, C0510


1Does H1 light up when the PowerSwitch is turned ON?

NOGo to step 5.

2 Is TH1 installed properly? NO Reinstall TH1.

3 Is TH1 dirty? YES Clean or change TH1.

Measure resistance of TH1. Is is infi- YES Change TH1.4 nite? NO Change PWB-A.

5Perform the “Controller Board Check.”Is malfunction code “C0311” displayed?

YESChange PWB-A.

Check H1 for continuity. Is there conti- YES Change SSR1.6 nuity? NO Change H1 or TS1.

C0520


1Does H1 remain lit after the copier haswarmed up?

NOGo to step 4.

2Perform the “Controller Board Check.”Is malfunction code “C0311” displayed?

YESChange PWB-A.

3 Does H1 turn OFF? NO Change SSR1.

4 Is TH1 installed properly? NO Reinstall TH1.

5 Is TH1 dirty? YES Clean or change TH1.

Measure resistance of TH1. Is is 0 Ω YES Change TH1 (TH2).6 or close to 0? NO Change PWB-A.


T-73

1156SBT040210A

10)C0600: Scanner Motor M2 Malfunction

C06FX: Signal Failure


Scanner Motor M4 Power Supply Unit PU1 SCP Board PWB-F Master Board PWB-A

1156C13TAA


T-74

C0600


1Are all connectors on PWB-F pluggedin securely?

NOPlug them in securely.

2Is the voltage across PWB-F PJ1F-2and GND DC5V?

NOCheck the connection of the DC5V lineand, if it is intact, change PU1.

Perform the “Controller Board Check.” YES Change PWB-A.3 Is malfunction code ”C031F” or

“C0320” displayed? NO Change PWB-F or M2.

C06FX


Are PWB-A PJ8A and PWB-F PJ2F YES Change PWB-A or PWB-F.1 connected securely? NO Connect securely.


T-75

1156SBT040211A

11) 0610: Lens Motor M6 Malfunction

0620: Mirror Motor M7 Malfunction


Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC86 Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90 Lens Motor M6 Mirror Motor M7

SCP Board PWB-F Master Board PWB-A

1156C14TAA


T-76

C0610


1Are all connectors on PWB-F, M6, andPC90 plugged in securely?


2Does the voltage across PWB-FPJ6F-5 and GND change from DC5Vto DC0V when PC90 is blocked?

NOChange PC90.

Is the Lens drive defective? YES Correct or change the defective part.3

NO Change PWB-F or M6.

C0620


1Are all connectors on PWB-F, M7, andPC86 plugged in securely?


2Does the voltage across PWB-FPJ6F-2 and GND change from DC5Vto DC0V when PC86 is blocked?

NOChange PC86.

Is the Mirror drive defective? YES Correct or change the defective part.3

NO Change PWB-F or M7.


T-77

1156SBT040212A

12)C0910: 2nd Drawer Upward Motion Failure

C0914: 2nd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M14’s Failure to Turn

C0920: 1st Drawer Upward Motion Failure

C0924: 1st Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M13’s Failure to Turn


1st Drawer Lift-Up Sensor PC65 2nd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor PC66 1st Drawer Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor PC67 2nd Drawer Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor PC68

1st Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M13 2nd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M14 Master Board PWB-A Power Supply Board PWB-C

1156C15TAA


T-78

C0910



1Using the IC Port Data Check function,make an input port check on PWB-A(IC3A) APB2.

NOCheck the Paper Take-Up Roll for op-eration. If it is operational, changePC66.

C0920



1Using the IC Port Data Check function,make an input port check on PWB-A(IC3A) APB1.


C0914


1Slide out the 2nd Drawer and slide itback into the copier. Does M14 turn atthis time?

YESGo to step 4.

Perform the “Controller Board Check.” YES Change PWB-A.2 Is malfunction code “C032E” dis-

played? NO Replace PWB-A.

Does the voltage across PWB-CPJ9C-4 and GND change from DC0V

YES Change M14.

3to DC24V when the 2nd Drawer is slidback into the copier? NO Change PWB-C.

Does the voltage across PWB-A YES Change PWB-A.4 PJ23A-5 and GND vary between DC0V

and DC5V while M14 is turning? NO Change PC68.

C0924


1Slide out the 1st Drawer and slide itback into the copier. Does M13 turn atthis time?

YESGo to step 4.

2Perform the “Controller Board Check.”Is malfunction code “C033O” dis-played?

YESChange PWB-A.

Does the voltage across PWB-CPJ9C-2 and GND change from DC0V

YES Change M13.

3to DC24V when the 1st Drawer is slidback into the copier? NO Change PWB-C.

Does the voltage across PWB-A YES Change PWB-A.4 PJ23A-7 and GND vary between DC0V

and DC5V while M13 is turning? NO Change PC67.


T-79

1156SBT040213A

13)C0900: 3rd Drawer Upward Motion Failure

C0904: 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M24’s Failure to Turn

C0950: 4th Drawer Upward Motion Failure

C0954: 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M25’s Failure to Turn


3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor PC19 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor PC23 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor

PC27 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor

PC28

3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M24 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor M25 PF-205 Master Board PWB-A

1156C25TAA


T-80

C0950


Does PC19 operate properly? YES Change PF-205 PWB-A.

1Using the IC Port Data Check function,make an input port check on PWB-A(200) (IC1A) PG3.


C0900


Does PC23 operate properly? YES Change PF–205 PWB-A.

1Using the IC Port Data Check function,make an input port check on PWB-A(200) (IC1A) PF3.


C0904


1Slide out the 3rd Drawer and slide itback into the copier. Does M24 turn atthis time?

NOGo to step 3.

Does the voltage across PF-205 PWB-A PJ9A-8B and GND change from

YES Change M24.

2DC0V to DC24V when the 3rd Draweris slid back into the copier? NO Change PF-205 PWB-A.

Does the voltage across PF-205 PWB- YES Change PF-205 PWB-A.3 A PJ9A-5B and GND vary between

DC0V and DC5V while M24 is turning? NO Change PC27.

C0954


1Slide out the 4th Drawer and slide itback into the copier. Does M25 turn atthis time?

NOGo to step 3.

Does the voltage across PF-205 PWB-A PJ9A-2A and GND change from

YES Change M25.

2DC0V to DC24V when the 4th Draweris slid back into the copier? NO Change PF-205 PWB-A.

Does the voltage across PF-205 PWB- YES Change PF-205 PWB-A.3 A PJ9A-4A and GND vary between

DC0V and DC5V while M25 is turning? NO Change PC28.


T-81

1156SBT040214A

14)C0911: 2nd Drawer Upward Motion Failure (Inch Areas)

C0912: 2nd Drawer Downward Motion Failure

C0913: 2nd Drawer Upward Motion Failure

C0916: 2nd Drawer Ejection Failure


2nd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor PC66 2nd Drawer Lower Limit Position Sensor PC70

2nd Drawer Flexible Printed Circuit Board PWB-M2

Master Board PWB-A

1156C35TAA


T-82

C0911


Does PC66 operate properly?Using the IC Port Data Check function,

YES Replace PWB-A.

1 make an input port check on PWB-A(IC3A) APB2. NO Replace PC66 or PWB-M2.

C0912, C0913



YES Replace PWB-A.

1 make an input port check on PWB-A(IC3A) BPA3. NO Replace PC70 or PWB-M2.

C0916


1Remove the Right Door, lift up the LockLever with a flat-blade screwdriver tounlock and slide out the 2nd Drawer.

–

2Is the Lock Release Spring installedproperly?

NOReinstall or change.

3Are the Lock Lever and Torsion Springinstalled properly?



T-83

1156SBT040215A

15)C0921: 1st Drawer Upward Motion Failure (Inch Areas)

C0922: 1st Drawer Downward Motion Failure

C0923: 1st Drawer Upward Motion Failure

C0926: 1st Drawer Ejection Failure


1st Drawer Lift-Up Sensor PC65 1st Drawer Lower Limit Position Sensor PC69

1st Drawer Flexible Printed Circuit Board PWB-M1

Master Board PWB-A

1156C36TAA


T-84

C0921



YES Replace PWB-A.

1 make an input port check on PWB-A(IC3A) APB1. NO Replace PC65 or PWB-M1.

C0922, C0923



YES Replace PWB-A.

1 make an input port check on PWB-A(IC3A) BPA2. NO Replace PC69 or PWB-M1.

C0926


1Remove the Right Door, lift up the LockLever with a flat-blade screwdriver tounlock and slide out the 1st Drawer.

–






T-85

1156SBT040216A

16)C0901: 3rd Drawer Upward Motion Failure (Inch Areas)

C0902: 3rd Drawer Downward Motion Failure

C0903: 3rd Drawer Upward Motion Failure

C0906: 3rd Drawer Ejection Failure


3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor PC19 3rd Drawer Lower Limit Position Sensor PC69

3rd Drawer Flexible Printed Circuit Board PWB-M1

PF-205 Master Board PWB-A

1156C37TAA


T-86

C0901



YES Replace PWB-A (PF-205).

1 make an input port check on PWB-A(MC) (IC1A) PG3. NO Replace PC19 or PWB-M1.

C0902, C0903




1 make an input port check on PWB-A(MC) (IC2A) PD1. NO Replace PC69 or PWB-M1.

C0906


1Remove the Right Door, lift up the LockLever with a flat-blade screwdriver tounlock and slide out the 3rd Drawer.

–






T-87

1156SBT040217A

17)C0951: 4th Drawer Upward Motion Failure (Inch Areas)

C0952: 4th Drawer Downward Motion Failure

C0953: 4th Drawer Upward Motion Failure

C0956: 4th Drawer Ejection Failure


4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor PC23 4th Drawer Lower Limit Position Sensor PC70

4th Drawer Flexible Printed Circuit Board PWB-M2

PF-205 Master Board PWB-A

1156C38TAA


T-88

C0951




1 make an input port check on PWB-A(MC) (IC1A) PF3. NO Replace PC23 or PWB-M2.

C0952, C0953




1 make an input port check on PWB-A(MC) (IC2A) PC0. NO Replace PC70 or PWB-M2.

C0956


1Remove the Right Door, lift up the LockLever with a flat-blade screwdriver tounlock and slide out the 4th Drawer.

–






T-89

1156SBT040218A

18)C0990: Main Tray Upward Motion Failure

C0991: Main Tray Downward Motion Failure

C0992: Main Tray Downward Motion Failure

C0993: Main Tray Upward Motion Failure

C0994: Elevator Motor M26’s Failure to Turn


Main Tray Lower Position Sensor PC2 Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC5 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor PC19 Lower Limit Position Sensor PC35

Cabinet Transport Board PWB-H PF-105 Master Board Main Tray Elevator Motor M26

1156C27TAA


T-90

C0990, C0991


Does PC19 operate properly? YES Change PF-105 PWB-A.

1Using the IC Port Data Check function,make an input port check on PWB-A(400) (IC1A) PG3.

NOCheck the Paper Take-Up Roll for op-eration and, if it is operational, changePC19.

C0992, C0993



YES Change PF-105 PWB-A.

1make an input port check on PWB-A(400) (IC2A) PB3. NO Change PWB-H, flat cable, or PC35.



2 make an input port check on PWB-A(400) (IC2A) PC1. NO Change PC2, PWB-H, or flat cable.

C0994


1Does M26 turn when the Paper De-scent key is pressed?

YESGo to step 3.

Does the voltage across PF-105 PWB-A PJ4A-6B or PJ4A-7B and GND YES

Change M26, PWB-H, or flat cable.

2 change from DC0V to DC24V when theTray is slid in or the Paper Descent keyis pressed?

NOChange PF-105 PWB-A.

Does the voltage across PF-105 PWB- YES Change PF-105 PWB-A.

3 A PJ4A-5A and GND vary betweenDC0V and DC5V while M26 is turning? NO

Check the pulse disk and gear.Change PC5.


T-91

1156SBT040219A

19)C0998: Shifter Transfer Failure

C0999: Shifter Return Failure

C099A: Shifter Return Failure

C099b: Shifter Transfer Failure

C099C: Shift Motor M27’s Failure to Turn


Shifter Home Position Sensor PC3 Shifter Return Position Sensor PC4 Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC6

Paper Shift Motor M27 Cabinet Transport Board PWB-H PF-105 Master Board PWB-A

1156C28TAA


T-92

C0998, C0999




1 make an input port check on PWB-A(400) (IC2A) PD1. NO Change PC4, PWB-H, or flat cable.

C099A, C099b





C099C


1Does M27 turn when the 3rd Drawer isslid into the copier with a paper stackloaded in the Shift Tray?

YESGo to step 3.

In step 1, does the voltage across YES Change M27, PWB-H, or flat cable.2 PF-105 PWB-A PJ4A-5B and GND

change from DC0V to DC24V? NO Change PF-105 PWB-A.

Does the voltage across PF-105 PWB- YES Change PF-105 PWB-A.

3 A PJ4A-3A and GND vary betweenDC0V and DC5V while M27 is turning? NO

Check the pulse disk and gear.Change PC6.


T-93

1156SBT040220A

20)C099E: Shift Gate Position Detecting Failure

C099F: Shift Gate Position Detecting Failure

C0996: 3rd Drawer Lock Release Failure

C0F79: Paper Empty Sensor Failure


Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor PC1 3rd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor PC20 Main Tray Paper Empty Board PWB-E

3rd Drawer Set Sensor PC7 Shift Gate Position Detecting Sensor PC34 3rd Drawer Lock Solenoid SL41 Cabinet Transport Board PWB-H PF-105 Master Board PWB-A

1156C29TAA


T-94

C099E, C099F





C0996


Does SL41 operate properly?Using the IC Port Data Check function,

YES Check the drawer lock mechanism.

1set the data of PWB-A (400) (IC2A)PA1 to ”0.” NO Change PF-105 PWB-A or SL41.



2 make an input port check on PWB-A(400) (IC1A) PG2. NO Change PC7, PWB-H, or flat cable.

C0F79




1make an input port check on PWB-A(400) (IC1A) PC0. NO Change PC20, PWB-H, or flat cable.

Does PWB-E operate properly?Using the IC Port Data Check function,


2make an input port check on PWB-A(400) (IC1A) PF3. NO Change PWB-E, PWB-H, or flat cable.



3make an input port check on PWB-A(400) (IC1A) PD1. NO Change PC1, PWB-H, or flat cable.


T-95

1156SBT040221A

21)C0d00: Duplex Unit Front/Rear Edge Guide Plate Home Position Detection

Failure

C0d20: Duplex Unit Gate Unit Home Position Detection Failure

C0d50: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31’s Failure to Turn

C0d51: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 Turning at Abnormal Timing


Duplex Gate Home Position Sensor PC8 Front/Rear Edge Guide Plate Home Position

Sensor PC9

Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 Gate Motor M32 Front/Rear Edge Guide Drive Motor M33 AD-9 Master Board PWB-G

1149C24TAA


T-96

C0d00


Does M33 turn when the Front/RearEdge Guide Plates are moved to a

YES Check for overload.

1position other than home and the Du-plex Unit is slid in? NO Change M33 or PWB-G.


YES Change PWB-G.

2 make an input port check on PWB-G(Dup) (IC1G) PC3. NO Change PC9.

C0d20


Does M32 turn when the Gate Unit is YES Check for overload.1 moved to a position other than home

and the Duplex Unit is slid in? NO Change M32 or PWB-G.


YES Change PWB-G.

2 make an input port check on PWB-G(Dup) (IC1G) PE0. NO Change PC8.

C0d50


Does M31 turn?Using the IC Port Data Check function,

YES Check the drive coupling.

1 set the data of PWB-A (Dup) (IC1G)PB3 to ”0.” NO Change M31 or PWB-G.

C0d51



YESChange PWB-G


YESChange PWB-G


T-97

1156SBT040222A

22)C0E00: Main Erase Lamp LA2’s Failure to Turn ON

C0E01: Main Erase Lamp LA2 Turning ON at Abnormal Timing


Main Erase Lamp LA2 Master Board PWB-A

1156C22TAA

C0E00


1Perform the “Controller Board Check.”Is malfunction code “C0328” dis-played?

YESChange PWB-A.

Does the voltage across PWB-APJ12A-3 and GND change from DC0V

YES Change LA2.

2 to DC24V when the Start key ispressed? NO Change PWB-A.

C0E01

Check the LA2 Failure Detection signalwhen LA2 is OFF. YES

Change PWB-A.

1 Using the IC Port Data Check function,check that the data of PWB-A (IC4A)APC7 is “H.”

NOChange LA2.


T-98

1156SBT040223A

23)C0E20: Image Erase Lamp LA3’s Failure to Turn ON


Image Erase Lamp LA3 Master Board PWB-A

1156C23TAA


1Perform the “Controller Board Check.”Is malfunction code “C0314 to C0317”displayed?

YESChange PWB-A.

Is the voltage across PWB-A PJ9A-1 YES Change LA3.2 and GND DC5V? NO Check the 5V line.


T-99

1156SBT040224A

24)C0F02: Original Size Detecting Board UN2 Malfunction

C0FE1 to C0FFF: Original Size Detecting Sensor Failure


Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 PC115 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 PC116 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 PC117 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3 PC118 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD2 PC119

Orignal Size Detecting Board UN2 Master Board PWB-A

1156C16TAA


T-100

C0F02


1Are PJ62 on UN2 and PJ7A on PWB-Aplugged in securely?


Does the voltage across PJ7A-6 on YES Change PWB-A.2 PWB-A and GND vary between DC0V

and DC5V? NO Change UN2.

C0FE1 to C0FFF


1Are the jumper connectors pluggedcorrectly into J1 and J2 on UN2?

NOChange the jumper connector posi-tions.

2Is each Original Size Detecting Sensorinstalled in correct position?

NOReinstall.

3

Is the malfunction code displayed againafter the Original Size Detecting Sen-sor corresponding to the malfunctioncode has been changed?

YES

Change UN2 or PWB-A.


T-101

1156SBT040225A

25)C0F10: AE Sensor Board PWB-H Malfunction


AE Sensor Board PWB-H Master Board PWB-A

1156C17TAA


Is the voltage across PWB-A PJ3A-3and GND DC0.18V or less when the YES

Change PWB-H.

1 Scanner is at the home position, theExposure Lamp is OFF, and the Origi-nal Cover is lowered?

NOChange PWB-A.


T-102

1156SBT040226A

26)C0F20: AIDC Sensor Board PWB-G Variation Correction Failure

C0F22: AIDC Sensor Board PWB-G Grid Voltage (Vg) Correction Failure

C0F23: AIDC Sensor Board PWB-G Exposure Correction Failure


AIDC Sensor Board PWB-G Master Board PWB-A

1156C18TAA


1 Is PWB-A PJ11A plugged in securely? NO Plug it in securely.

2 Is CN35 plugged in securely? NO Plug it in securely.

3Is PWB-G installed in the correct posi-tion?

NOReinstall.

Is the photoreceiver or LED of PWB-G YES Clean.4 dirty? NO Change PWB-G or PWB-A.


T-103

1156SBT040227A

27)C0F30: ATDC Sensor UN3 Failure

C0F31: ATDC Sensor UN3 Failure


ATDC Sensor UN3 Master Board PWB-A

1156C19TAA


1Is the malfunction code “C0F30” dis-played?

YESGo to step 3.

2Is the value for “ATDC Ref. Value” of“Level History” equal to the value givenon the Adjust Label?

NOEnter the value given on the Adjust La-bel.

3 Is PWB-A PJ11A plugged in securely? NO Plug it in securely.

4 Is CN35 plugged in securely? NO Plug it in securely.

5 Is UN3 installed in the correct position? NO Reinstall.


T-104

1156SBT0403A

4-3. Power Malfunctions1156SBT040301A

1) Main Relay Does Not Turn ON.


Power Switch S1 Main Relay RY1 Power Supply Unit PU1

Master Board PWB-A Power Supply Board PWB-C Noise Filter Board PWB-D

1156C20TAA


T-105


1Is the source voltage applied to the cir-cuit across PJ1-1 and -2 on PU1?

NOChange PWB-D.

2Is the voltage across PJ2-2 or -3 onPU1 and GND DC24V?

NOCheck the fuse on PU1 and, if it is in-tact, change PU1.

3Is the voltage across PJ6C-1 on PWB-C and GND DC24V when S1 is turnedON?

NOCheck the wiring between PWB-C andS1 and, if it is intact, change PWB-C orS1.

4Is the voltage across PJ21-2 on PU1and GND DC5V? NO

Check the wiring between PWB-C andS1 and, if it is intact, change PWB-C orS1.

5

Is the wiring between PWB-A, PWB-C,and RY1 intact?

YESChange PWB-A, PWB-C, and RY1, inthat order.

NOCorrect the wiring or change the har-ness.


T-106

1156SBT040302A

2) Main Relay Turns ON But the Control Panel Gives No Display.


Power Supply Unit PU1 Control Panel UN1

MSC Board PWB-B Power Supply Board PWB-C

1156C21TAA


1

Is the voltage across PJ22-2 on PU1and GND DC5V?

YESCheck the wiring between PU1 andUN1.

NO Change PU1.

2

Is the voltage across PJ21-2 on PU1and GND DC5V?

YESCheck the wiring between PU1 andPWB-B.

NO Change PU1.

3

Is the voltage across PJ3C-1 on PWB-C and GND DC24V?

YESCheck the wiring between PWB-C andUN1.

NO Change PWB-C.

Is the connection between PWB-B and YES Change PWB-B or UN1.

4 UN1 normal?NO

Correct the wiring or change the har-ness.


T-107

1156SBT0404A

4-4. Miscellaneous The message “Stabilizing Image Controller not run.” appears on the Touch Panel.

Condition Detection Timing

T/C is less than 4% when an F5 operation isrun (initial adjustment).

Memory clear “PC Drum” of “Port/Option” counter is cleared. AIDC Sensor Board PWB-G develops a malfunc-

tion.

<Procedure>


1

Is “ATDC Current Level” of “Level His-tory” available from Tech. Rep. mode

YESRun the auxiliary toner replenishingcycle and then an F5 operation.

less than 4%?NO Run an F5 operation again.


T-108

1149SAT0500A

IMAGE FAILURE51149SBT0501A

5-1. Image Failure TroubleshootingImage failures have many possible causes. For troubleshooting, it is necessary to determine whether a fail-ure is attributable to a basic cause or any other cause.

In this chapter, troubleshooting is divided into “initial checks” and “troubleshooting procedures classified byimage failure”. If an image failure has occurred, first make the initial checks, then proceed to the correspond-ing image failure troubleshooting procedure.

1149SBT0502A

5-2. Initial Checks

1) Place of installation Is the source voltage normal? Does the voltage vary greatly? Is the copier installed in a hot, humid place or in a place where temperatures vary sharply? Is the copier installed in a dusty place? Is the copier subjected to direct sunlight? Is the copier level?

2) Copy paper Is the recommended paper used?Load recommended paper and make copies to see if the problem persists.

Is the paper damp?Load new paper and make copies to see if the problem persists.

3) Original Does the original used have a reddish background or is it written in light pencil?Use the Test Chart to check the image.

Is the original transparent or are transparencies being used?Cover with white paper and make a copy.

Are the Original Glass and ADF Transport Belt dirty or scratched?If dirty, clean with alcohol. If scratched, replace.

4) Adjust data and Level History data Are the set values of “Adjust” and “Level History (ATDC Level)” in the Tech. Rep. mode equal to the value

given on the Adjust Label inside the Front Door?When installing the Developing Unit of another copier containing its own developer, input the ATDC Lev-

el value of that particular copier.

5) PM parts (supplies) Have the PM parts (supplies), such as the PC Drum, Cleaning Blade, AIDC Sensor and corona wires,

reached the end of their cleaning/replacement cycles?


T-109

6) Adjustment items (registration, focus, AE level, etc.) Among the adjustment items given in DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT, is there any adjustment that

may remedy the image failure?

7) Controller Board Check Is a malfunction code displayed when “Controller Board Check” in the Tech. Rep. mode is run?


T-110

1149SBT0503A

5-3. Troubleshooting Procedures Classified by Image Failure<Image Failure Samples>

1) Blank copy 3) Low image density2) Black copy

1149T012AA

4) Foggy background 6) Black spots5) Black streaks or bands

7) Blank streaks or bands 8) Void areas 9) Smear on back


T-111

1149SBT050301A

1) Blank Copy

Cause Step Check Item Result Action

Charging failure1

Is the PC Drum Charge Co-rona installed correctly?

NOInstall correctly.

2Are the Comb Electrodewire and grid mesh normal?

NOCheck and change if neces-sary.

Is the wiring between HighVoltage Unit HV1 and the

YES Change HV1.

3PC Drum Charge Coronanormal? NO Correct the wiring.

Developing Unit out 4 Is the PC Unit in position? NO Reinstall the Unit.of position

5Are the Ds Rolls in contactwith the PC Drum?

NOReinstall the DevelopingUnit.

6 Is the Developing Unit con-nector plugged in?

NOPlug it in.

7Is the drive transmissionmechanism to the Develop-ing Unit intact?

NOCheck and change any de-fective part.

Image transfer fail-ure

8Is the Image Transfer Coro-na wire normal?


Is the wiring between High YES Change HV1.9 Voltage Unit HV1 and coro-

na wire normal? NO Correct wiring.

Paper guide shorting10

Is the paper guide shortedto the frame? YES

Connect the paper guidethrough the resistor to theframe.

1149SBT050302A

2) Black copy


PC Drum groundingfailure

1Is the PC Drum properlygrounded?

NOClean or change the PCDrum Ground Plate.

Developing bias fail-ure

2Is the developing bias con-tact normal?

NOClean or replace the devel-oping bias contact.

3

Is the developing bias har-ness intact?

YESChange the High VoltageUnit for drum charging.

NO Change the harness.

Light path failure4

Has condensation formedon the mirrors, lenses, orPC Drum?

YESClean the mirrors andlenses, and run the DrumDehum. operation.

5Are the mirrors installedproperly?

NOReinstall the mirrors.

Exposure Lamp’sfailure to turn ON

6Does the Exposure Lamplight up?

NOTake the action for malfunc-tion code C0400.


T-112

1149SBT050303A

3) Low Image Density


PC Drum life1

Does the PC Drum haveenough service life?

NOChange the PC Drum.

2Do the fan motors turnproperly? (Ozone deteriora-tion, temperature rise)

NOTroubleshoot the fan mo-tors.

PC Drum groundingfailure

3Is the PC Drum groundedproperly?


Drum charge failure4

Are the Comb Electrodeand grid mesh normal?


Is the wiring between HighVoltage Unit HV1 and the

YES Change HV1.

5PC Drum Charge Coronanormal? NO Correct the wiring.

Optical failure6

Are the mirrors and lensesdirty or covered with con-densation?

YESClean the mirrors andlenses.


7Is the Image Transfer Coro-na dirty?

YESClean the Image TransferCorona or change the wire.

8

Is the copy paper damp?

YES

Change the copy paper andinstruct the user in how tostore paper and to keep thecopier plugged in during thenight.

Developing failure 9 Is Db adjusted properly? NO Make Db adjustment.

10Are the Ds Rolls in contactwith the PC Drum?

NOReinstall the DevelopingUnit.


NOClean or Change the devel-oping bias contact.


T-113

1149SBT050304A

4) Foggy background


Cleaning failure1

Is the Cleaning Blade dirtywith foreign matter, paperdust, etc. or is it scratched?

YESChange the CleaningBlade.

Optical failure2

Are the mirrors and lensesdirty?


PC Drum failure3

Is the PC Drum dirty withforeign matter, etc.? YES

Clean or replace the PCDrum. Change the CleaningBlade if necessary.

4Is the PC Drum properlygrounded?


Developing failure

5

Is the Sleeve Roller abnor-mally dirty?

YES

Clean the Sleeve Roller.Check the Developer Scat-tering Prevention Seal tosee if it is deformed or dirty.


NOClean or change the devel-oping bias contact.

Main Erase Lampfailure

7Does the Main Erase Lamplight up properly?

NOReplace the Main EraseLamp.

8Is the Main Erase Lampdirty?

YESClean the Main EraseLamp.

AIDC Sensor failure9

Is the AIDC Sensor clean orinstalled properly?

NOClean or reinstall the AIDCSensor and execute F5.

10Is the AIDC halftone patterndirty? YES

Using care not to scratch,wipe the pattern with a drysoft cloth and run F5.


T-114

1149SBT050305A

5) Black Streaks or Bands


Uneven charging

1

Are the Comb Electrodeand grid mesh dirty?

YES

Clean or replace the PCDrum Charge Corona.Check the toner suctionmechanism for operation.

Cleaning failure

2

Is the Cleaning Blade dirtywith foreign matter, paperdust, etc., or is itscratched?

YES

Change the CleaningBlade.

3Does the Cleaning Blademake a correct lateral mo-tion?

NOCheck the Cleaning Bladefor operation.

PC Drum failure4

Is the PC Drum surfacedirty or scratched? YES

Change the PC Drum. Ifnecessary, change theCleaning Blade.

PC Drum PaperSeparator Fingers

5

Are the PC Drum PaperSeparator Fingers dirty, de-formed or faulty in opera-tion?

YES

Clean or replace the PCDrum Paper Separator Fin-gers.

Fusing failure6

Is the Upper Fusing Rollerdirty or scratched?

YESClean or replace the UpperFusing Roller.

7Are the Upper Paper Sepa-rator Fingers dirty or de-formed?

YESClean or replace the UpperPaper Separator Fingers.

Optical failure8

Are the mirrors and lensesdirty with foreign matter?


1149SBT050306A

6) Black Spots


PC Drum failure1

Is the PC Drum surfacescratched or dirty with for-eign matter?

YESClean or change the PCDrum. Change the CleaningBlade if necessary.

Fusing failure2

Is the Upper Fusing Rollerdirty or scratched? YES

Check the Fusing Thermis-tors. Clean or change theUpper Fusing Roller.

Developing failure3

Is the amount of toner onthe Sleeve Roller proper?

YESGo to step 5.

4Is the toner-to-carrier ratiorelatively high?

YESChange the toner-to-carrierratio.

5 Is the Db value normal? NO Make Db adjustment.

6Is the Developer ScatteringPrevention Seal deformedor dirty?

YESClean or change the Devel-oper Scattering PreventionSeal.

Dirty PC Drum Pa-per Separator Fin-gers

7Are the PC Drum PaperSeparator Fingers dirty ordeformed?

YESClean or change the PCDrum Paper Separator Fin-gers.


T-115

1149SBT050307A

7) Blank Streaks or Bands


Plugged Db1

Is Db plugged with foreignmatter, caked toner, etc.? YES

Remove foreign matter. Ifthe problem persists,change the developer.

Drum charge failure2

Are the Comb Electrodeand grid mesh dirty?

YESClean or change the PCDrum Charge Corona.

3Is the Drum Charge CoronaWire Cleaner at the homeposition?

NOCheck the corona wirecleaning mechanism.


4Is the Image Transfer Coro-na wire dirty?

YESClean or change the ImageTransfer Corona.

5Is the Corona Wire Cleanerat the home position?

NOCheck the corona wirecleaning mechanism.

Defective PC DrumPaper SeparatorFingers

6Are the PC Drum PaperSeparator Fingers dirty ordeformed?

YESClean or replace the PCDrum Paper Separator Fin-gers.

Image Erase Lamplit at abnormal timing 7

Does the Image EraseLamp light up at abnormaltiming?

YESCheck the Image EraseLamp.

Fusing failure8

Is the Upper Fusing Rollerdirty or scratched?

YESClean or change the UpperFusing Roller.

9Are the Upper Paper Sepa-rator Fingers dirty orscratched?

YESClean or change the UpperPaper Separator Fingers.


T-116

1149SBT050308A

8) Void Areas



1Is the Image Transfer Coro-na installed properly?

NOReinstall.

2Is the Image Transfer Coro-na wire dirty?

YESClean or change the ImageTransfer Corona wire.

Damp copy paper

3

Is the image improved byloading new paper?

YES

Change the copy paper andinstruct the user in how tostore paper and to keep thecopier plugged in during thenight.

Small amount of ton-er supplied

4

Is toner uniformly attractedonto the Sleeve Roller?

NO

Check the Db value andamount of developer, andcheck the Bucket Roller foroperation.

PC Drum condensa-tion 5

Is the image improved byrunning Drum Dehum.? YES

Run Drum Dehum. andinstruct the user to take fur-ther action.

Paper guide shorting6

Is the paper guide shortedto the frame? YES

Connect the paper guidethrough the resistor to theframe.

Fusing failure7

Is the Lower Fusing Rollerscratched or deformed?

YESReplace the Lower FusingRoller.

1149SBT050309A

9) Smear on Back


Dirty DevelopingUnit 1

Is the bottom part of theDeveloping Unit dirty? YES

Clean, and check the De-veloper Scattering Preven-tion Seal.

Dirty Image TransferCorona

2Is the Image Transfer Coro-na dirty?

YESClean the corona andcheck the Developing Unit.

3Is the Pre-Image TransferGuide Plate dirty?

YESClean the guide plate andcheck the Developing Unit.

Dirty Suction Unit4

Are the Suction Belts dirty?YES

Clean the Suction Belts andcheck the Developing Unit.

Dirty Fusing Unit5

Is the Fusing Unit EntranceGuide Plate dirty?

YESClean the guide plate andcheck the Developing Unit.

6

Are the Upper and LowerFusing Rollers dirty?

YES

Clean or change the Upperand Lower Fusing Rollersand check the Fusing Rollercleaning mechanism.



Printed in Japan


1156-7998-11 97046000

1156SBT000EA

Documents

diagramasde.comdiagramasde.com/diagramas/otros2/EP4000-5000SM.pdfinterleaf ep5000/ep4000 general, mechanical/electrical 97.04.01 g-5 1149sbg0300a 3 precautions for use